RTN 950 Commissioning and Configuration Guide - (V100R003C01 - 01) PDF

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
V100R003C01
Commissioning and Configuration

Guide
Issue 01
Date 2011-03-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Commissioning and Configuration Guide About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 950 V100R003C01
iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document contains two parts, namely, the commissioning guide and configuration guide.
l The commissioning guide describes how to commission the OptiX RTN 950, including
preparations before commissioning, site commissioning, and system commissioning.
l The configuration guide describes how to configure various types of services on the OptiX
RTN 950, including basic concepts, configuration procedures, configuration examples, and
related tasks.
The intended audience of this document are:

l Installation and commissioning engineers
l Data configuration engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

About This Document Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize

or supplement important points of the main
text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Commissioning and Configuration Guide About This Document
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made to previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C01

This is the first document issue for the V100R003C01 product version.
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Commissioning and Configuration Guide Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols..........................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.....................................................................................................................1-7
1.5 Storage Batteries.............................................................................................................................................1-7
1.6 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................1-9
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers..................................................................................................................1-9
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure....................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas...................................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.4 Laser.....................................................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.5 Microwave............................................................................................................................................1-13
1.7 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................1-13
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.......................................................................................................................1-13
1.7.2 Using Ladders......................................................................................................................................1-14
1.8 Mechanical Safety.........................................................................................................................................1-16
1.9 Other Precautions..........................................................................................................................................1-17
2 Notices for High-Risk Operations..........................................................................................2-1

2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper.................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable....................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board...................................................................................................................2-6
3 Commissioning Preparations...................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.....................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method.......................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions.............................................................................................................3-3
3.3.1 Site Commissioning...............................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 System Commissioning..........................................................................................................................3-4
4 Commissioning Process............................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Site Commissioning Process...........................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 System Commissioning Process......................................................................................................................4-2
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Contents Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning...................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Powering On the Equipment...........................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT.....................................................................5-4
5.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU..................................................................................................5-10
5.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.........................................................................................5-12
5.2.3 Logging In to an NE.............................................................................................................................5-13
5.2.4 Changing the NE ID.............................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.5 Changing the NE Name........................................................................................................................5-15
5.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................5-16
5.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards.................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.8 Synchronizing NE Time.......................................................................................................................5-18
5.2.9 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................5-19
5.2.10 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link......................................................................5-20
5.2.11 Creating an XPIC Workgroup............................................................................................................5-22
5.2.12 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup..........................................................................5-23
5.2.13 Checking Alarms................................................................................................................................5-24
5.3 Testing Connectivity of Cables.....................................................................................................................5-25
5.3.1 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables.............................................................................................5-25
5.3.2 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection.....................................................................................................5-26
5.4 Aligning the Antennas...................................................................................................................................5-28
5.4.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes...................................................................................................................5-29
5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas....................................................................................................5-31
5.4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas......................................................................................................5-34
5.5 Checking the Status of Radio Links..............................................................................................................5-37
5.6 Querying the DCN Status..............................................................................................................................5-38
6 System Commissioning............................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data........................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services................................................................................................................................6-2
6.3 Testing AM Switching....................................................................................................................................6-5
6.4 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................6-7
6.4.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching.......................................................................................................................6-7
6.4.2 Testing ERPS Switching......................................................................................................................6-10
6.5 Checking the Clock Status............................................................................................................................6-12
7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data...............................................................................7-1

7.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 DCN.......................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE...............................................................................................................................7-5
7.1.3 ID and IP Address of an NE...................................................................................................................7-5
7.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards......................................................................................................7-6
7.1.5 Adaptive Modulation..............................................................................................................................7-6
7.1.6 CCDP and XPIC.....................................................................................................................................7-8
7.1.7 RF Configuration Modes........................................................................................................................7-9
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers.........................................................................................................................7-10

7.1.9 IF_ETH Port.........................................................................................................................................7-10
7.1.10 Auto-Negotiation................................................................................................................................7-10
7.1.11 Flow Control Function.......................................................................................................................7-12
7.1.12 Clock Source......................................................................................................................................7-13
7.1.13 Clock Protection Modes.....................................................................................................................7-13
7.1.14 Clock Synchronization Policy............................................................................................................7-17
7.2 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................................7-20
7.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Network).....................................................................................................7-21
7.2.2 Configuration Procedure (Radio Link)................................................................................................7-28
7.2.3 Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Services).......................................................................................7-32
7.2.4 Configuration Procedure (Clocks).......................................................................................................7-38
7.3 Configuration Example (Ring Network Based on Point-to-Point Transparent Transmission).....................7-40
7.3.1 Network Diagram.................................................................................................................................7-40
7.3.2 Service Planning (Network).................................................................................................................7-42
7.3.3 Service Planning (Radio Links)...........................................................................................................7-43
7.3.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................7-47
7.3.5 Service Planning (Clocks)....................................................................................................................7-51
7.3.6 Configuration Process (Network).........................................................................................................7-52
7.3.7 Configuration Process (Radio Link)....................................................................................................7-55
7.3.8 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services)..........................................................................................7-57
7.3.9 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................7-62
7.3.10 Configuration Process (Clocks).........................................................................................................7-65
7.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links with XPIC Enabled)..........................................................................7-65
7.4.1 Network Diagram.................................................................................................................................7-66
7.4.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................7-68
7.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................7-71
8 Task Collection...........................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Network Management.....................................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Managing NEs........................................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method........................................................................................ 8-3
8.1.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method.......................................................................................8-4
8.1.1.3 Logging In to an NE............................................................................................................................8-5
8.1.1.4 Configuring the Logical Board........................................................................................................... 8-6
8.1.1.5 Changing the NE ID............................................................................................................................8-7
8.1.1.6 Changing the NE Name.......................................................................................................................8-8
8.1.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time................................................................................................................8-9
8.1.1.8 Localizing the NE Time....................................................................................................................8-10
8.1.2 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs.....................................................................8-11
8.1.3 Managing Communications.................................................................................................................8-12
8.1.3.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters............................................................................................8-13
8.1.3.2 Configuring DCCs.............................................................................................................................8-14
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

8.1.3.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication....................................................................................8-15

8.1.3.4 Creating Static IP Routes..................................................................................................................8-17
8.1.3.5 Setting Parameters of the OSPF Protocol.........................................................................................8-17
8.1.3.6 Enabling the ARP Proxy...................................................................................................................8-18
8.1.3.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN..............................................8-19
8.1.3.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports.............................................8-20
8.1.3.9 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN..........................................................................8-21
8.1.3.10 Querying ECC Routes.....................................................................................................................8-22
8.1.3.11 Querying IP Routes.........................................................................................................................8-22
8.1.3.12 Configuring Access Control............................................................................................................8-23
8.1.4 Configuring Service Access of NEs ....................................................................................................8-23
8.1.4.1 Configuring LCT Access to NEs......................................................................................................8-24
8.1.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Access to NEs................................................................................................8-24
8.1.4.3 Configuring Serial Interface Access to NEs......................................................................................8-25
8.1.5 Configuring an NE User.......................................................................................................................8-26
8.1.5.1 Creating an NE User.........................................................................................................................8-26
8.1.5.2 Changing the Password of an NE User.............................................................................................8-27
8.1.5.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters..................................................................................................8-28
8.2 Managing Radio Links..................................................................................................................................8-29
8.2.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................8-29
8.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup..............................................................................................................8-30
8.2.3 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup............................................................................8-32
8.2.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................8-33
8.2.5 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.................................................................................................8-35
8.2.6 IF 1+1 Protection Switching................................................................................................................8-36
8.3 Managing Ports.............................................................................................................................................8-36
8.3.1 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ports..............................................................................................8-37
8.3.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports...............................................................................8-37
8.3.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports............................................................................8-38
8.3.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports...............................................................................8-39
8.3.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports...........................................................................8-40
8.3.2 Setting Parameters of the IF_ETH Port................................................................................................8-41
8.3.2.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port...........................................................................8-41
8.3.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of the IF_ETH Port...........................................................................8-42
8.3.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the IF_ETH Port.......................................................................8-43
8.3.3 Setting Parameters of IF Interfaces......................................................................................................8-44
8.3.3.1 Setting IF Attributes..........................................................................................................................8-44
8.3.3.2 Configuring the ATPC Attributes.....................................................................................................8-46
8.3.3.3 Querying the AM Status....................................................................................................................8-46
8.3.3.4 Querying the ATPC Adjustment Records.........................................................................................8-47
8.3.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports...................................................................................................8-47
8.3.4.1 Setting the Transmit Frequency Attribute of the ODU.....................................................................8-48
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

8.3.4.2 Querying the ODU Attribute.............................................................................................................8-49

8.3.4.3 Setting the Power Attributes of the ODU..........................................................................................8-49
8.3.4.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the ODU....................................................................................8-50
8.3.4.5 Setting the State of an ODU Transmitter..........................................................................................8-51
8.3.4.6 Querying the History Transmit Power and Receive Power..............................................................8-52
8.4 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane.................................................................8-52
8.4.1 Managing the LAG...............................................................................................................................8-53
8.4.1.1 Creating a LAG.................................................................................................................................8-53
8.4.1.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs............................................................................................................8-55
8.4.1.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG................................................................................8-56
8.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................8-57
8.4.2.1 Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services..........................................8-57
8.4.2.2 Deleting an E-Line Service...............................................................................................................8-58
8.4.3 Managing the QoS................................................................................................................................8-59
8.4.3.1 Creating a DS Domain......................................................................................................................8-59
8.4.3.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain..............................................................8-61
8.4.3.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types...............................8-62
8.4.3.4 Creating a Port Policy.......................................................................................................................8-64
8.4.3.5 Modifying the Port Policy.................................................................................................................8-65
8.4.3.6 Creating the Traffic...........................................................................................................................8-66
8.4.3.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy........................................................................................8-67
8.4.3.8 Configuring Port Shaping..................................................................................................................8-69
8.4.3.9 Querying the Port Policy...................................................................................................................8-70
8.4.3.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.................................................................................................8-70
8.4.4 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM.............................................................................................................8-71
8.4.4.1 Creating an MD.................................................................................................................................8-72
8.4.4.2 Creating an MA.................................................................................................................................8-73
8.4.4.3 Creating an MEP Point......................................................................................................................8-73
8.4.4.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA.....................................................................................................8-74
8.4.4.5 Creating an MIP................................................................................................................................8-75
8.4.4.6 Performing a CC Test........................................................................................................................8-76
8.4.4.7 Performing an LB Test......................................................................................................................8-77
8.4.4.8 Performing an LT Test......................................................................................................................8-78
8.4.5 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM ............................................................................................................8-79
8.4.5.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function..................................................................................8-79
8.4.5.2 Enabling the Remote Alarm Support for Link Event........................................................................8-80
8.4.5.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold ...............................................................8-81
8.4.5.4 Performing Remote Loopback..........................................................................................................8-82
8.4.5.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection ..........................................................................................................8-83
8.4.6 Using the RMON.................................................................................................................................8-84
8.4.6.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port....................................8-84
8.4.6.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port...........................................................................8-85
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

8.4.6.3 Configuring a History Control Group...............................................................................................8-86

8.4.6.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port......................................8-87
8.5 Managing the Clock......................................................................................................................................8-88
8.5.1 Configuring the Clock Sources............................................................................................................8-89
8.5.2 Configuring Clock Subnets..................................................................................................................8-90
8.5.3 Self-Defined Clock Quality..................................................................................................................8-90
8.5.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status.....................................................................................................8-91
8.5.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status..............................................................................................8-92
8.5.6 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source.....................................................................8-93
8.5.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status........................................................................................8-93
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 A-E................................................................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................A-10
A.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................A-14
A.5 P-T...............................................................................................................................................................A-19
A.6 U-Z..............................................................................................................................................................A-27
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Commissioning and Configuration Guide Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap...............................................................................................................1-7

Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface..................................................................................................................1-11
Figure 1-3 Level optical interface......................................................................................................................1-11
Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects......................................................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder...............................................................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof.............................................................................1-16
Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch............................................................................................................................2-2
Figure 5-1 Normal state........................................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Normal state........................................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Configuration flowchart.....................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-4 Testing the Ethernet service cable....................................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-5 Connection diagram for checking the fiber connection by using an SFP optical module................5-27
Figure 5-6 Main lobe and side lobes..................................................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-7 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna.............................................................................5-30
Figure 5-8 Three tracking paths.........................................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-9 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe....................................................................................5-31
Figure 5-10 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter............................................................................5-33
Figure 5-11 Hop management............................................................................................................................5-38
Figure 6-1 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services.............................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching........................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-3 Configuration for testing ERPS........................................................................................................6-10
Figure 7-1 IP over DCC solution.........................................................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Inband DCN solution..........................................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 Adaptive modulation..........................................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-4 Single-polarized transmission.............................................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-5 CCDP transmission.............................................................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-6 Clock source protection based on priorities......................................................................................7-14
Figure 7-7 SSM protection.................................................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-8 Extended SSM protection.................................................................................................................7-17
Figure 7-9 Clock synchronization policy for a chain network...........................................................................7-18
Figure 7-10 Clock synchronization policy for a tree network............................................................................7-19
Figure 7-11 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network...........................................................................7-20
Figure 7-12 Clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network.......................................................7-20
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Figures Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 7-13 Configuration flowchart (network).................................................................................................7-22

Figure 7-14 Configuration flowchart (IP radio links)........................................................................................7-29
Figure 7-15 Configuration flowchart................................................................................................................. 7-32
Figure 7-16 Configuration flowchart (clocks)....................................................................................................7-38
Figure 7-17 Network diagram (network topology)............................................................................................7-41
Figure 7-18 Network diagram (board configuration).........................................................................................7-42
Figure 7-19 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (IP radio network)........................................................................7-43
Figure 7-20 Basic information about radio links................................................................................................7-44
Figure 7-21 Clock source information (IP radio network).................................................................................7-52
Figure 7-22 Network diagram............................................................................................................................7-67
Figure 7-23 Board configurations (NE1 and NE2)............................................................................................7-68
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Commissioning and Configuration Guide Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950...........................................................................1-3
Table 3-1 Tools and meters..................................................................................................................................3-2
Table 4-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.............................................................4-2
Table 4-2 System commissioning process............................................................................................................4-3
Table 5-1 Fuse currents........................................................................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 Status of indicators...............................................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-3 Procedure for configuring NE data......................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-4 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)...............................................................5-7
Table 5-5 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)................................................................5-8
Table 7-1 Comparison Between the IP over DCC Solution and the Inband DCN Solution................................7-4
Table 7-2 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards.................................................................7-6
Table 7-3 Auto-negotiation rules of FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port adopts the auto-negotiation
mode)...................................................................................................................................................................7-11
Table 7-4 Auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port adopts the auto-
negotiation mode)................................................................................................................................................7-11
Table 7-5 Procedure for creating NEs................................................................................................................7-23
Table 7-6 Procedures for setting NE attributes..................................................................................................7-23
Table 7-7 Procedure for setting NE communication parameters........................................................................7-24
Table 7-8 Procedure for configuring the inband DCN solution.........................................................................7-24
Table 7-9 Procedure for configuring the IP over DCC solution.........................................................................7-25
Table 7-10 Procedure for configuring extended ECC communication..............................................................7-26
Table 7-11 Procedure for querying IP routes.....................................................................................................7-26
Table 7-12 Procedure for synchronizing the NE time........................................................................................7-27
Table 7-13 Procedure for setting the performance monitoring status................................................................7-28
Table 7-14 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)............................................................7-29
Table 7-15 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)...........................................................7-30
Table 7-16 Procedure for configuring a LAG....................................................................................................7-33
Table 7-17 Procedure for configuring E-Line services......................................................................................7-34
Table 7-18 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports.........................................................................................7-35
Table 7-19 Procedure for configuring IF_ETH ports.........................................................................................7-35
Table 7-20 Procedure for configuring QoS........................................................................................................7-36
Table 7-21 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.................................................................7-37
Table 7-22 Procedure for configuring clocks.....................................................................................................7-39
Table 7-23 Ethernet service capacity of each BTS.............................................................................................7-41
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Tables Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Table 7-24 Basic information about radio links.................................................................................................7-43

Table 7-25 Hybrid/AM attribute information.....................................................................................................7-45
Table 7-26 Power and ATPC information..........................................................................................................7-45
Table 7-27 IF board information........................................................................................................................7-46
Table 7-28 Ethernet port information (NE1 to NE4)......................................................................................... 7-47
Table 7-29 IF_ETH port information (NE1 to NE4)..........................................................................................7-48
Table 7-30 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service (NE1).......................................................7-48
Table 7-34 Service type and PHB service class.................................................................................................7-50
Table 7-35 Queue scheduling policies................................................................................................................7-51
Table 7-36 Ethernet service capacity of each NE...............................................................................................7-66
Table 7-37 Basic information about radio links.................................................................................................7-68
Table 7-38 Hybrid/AM attribute information.....................................................................................................7-69
Table 7-39 Power and ATPC information..........................................................................................................7-70
Table 7-40 Configuration information about XPIC workgroups....................................................................... 7-70
Table 7-41 LAG information..............................................................................................................................7-71
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 1 Safety Precautions
1 Safety Precautions
About This Chapter
This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and
maintaining Huawei devices.
1.1 General Safety Precautions

This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
1.3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
1.5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
1.8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
1.9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

1 Safety Precautions Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1.1 General Safety Precautions

This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
All Safety Precautions

To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety
precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the
safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.
Local Laws and Regulations

When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety
precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and
regulations.
Basic Installation Requirements

The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and
be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.
l Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot
and maintain the device.
l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or
change the device or parts of the device (including software).
l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.
Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing
the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.
l Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.
l The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device,
check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly
grounded.
Human Safety
l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.
l When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

NOTE
The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.
l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt
by laser beams.
l Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist
strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,
to prevent electric shock and burn.
l In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the
fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building
again in any situation.
Device Safety
l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as
on a wall or in a rack.
l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.
l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.
l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols

Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950 and their meanings.
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Indication
This symbol is for ESD protection.

A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear an
ESD wrist strap or glove when you touch a board. Otherwise,
you may cause damage to the board.
This symbol is for the laser class.

CLASS 1
LASER A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser.
PRODUCT Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it may
damage you eyes or skin.
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY

WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT

Symbol Indication
A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is

grounded.
A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter should
ATTENTION 警告 be cleaned periodically.
CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗
严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 This symbol is for fan safety.

DON'T TOUCH THE
FAN LEAVES BEFORE A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves should
THEY SLOW DOWN !
not be touched when the fan is rotating.
1.3 Electrical Safety

This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
High Voltage
DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or
both.
Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.
DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather
conditions.

High Leakage Current
WARNING
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device
cannot be ensured.
If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must
connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C
input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.
Power Cables
DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of
the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or
eye injury.
l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
l Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is
correct.
Device with Power On
DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.
DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.
Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in
accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

CAUTION
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the
ventilation plate of the subrack.
CAUTION
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.
Fuse
WARNING
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to
ensure safe operation of the device.
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive
components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).
l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations:
physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in
the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.
l Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is properly
grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive components from
being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.
Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas

This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.
Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.
1.5 Storage Batteries

This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar
with the method of connecting a storage battery.
l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any short-
circuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.
l If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may
corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,
which leads to human injuries.

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:
l Use special insulation tools.

l Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
l Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing
electrolyte.
l When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.
l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.
Short-Circuit
DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery
is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.
Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working
battery before performing other operations.
Hazardous Gas
CAUTION
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it
properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device
erosion.
Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing
measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.
Battery Temperature
CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the
electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

Battery Leakage
CAUTION
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.
When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When
you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the
leaking electrolyte:
l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)
l Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by
the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte
immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital
immediately.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers

The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas
The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.
1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers

The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye
exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The
laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.
Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces
CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before
the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical interface
on the equipment.
The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following
special cleaning tools and materials:
l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also
be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
l Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
l Special magnifier for fiber connectors
For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the OptiX
RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Replacing Optical Fibers

When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a
protective cap.
Connecting Optical Fibers

l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power
damages the optical interface.
l Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the
IN port instead of the OUT port.
l Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical
distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.
Figure 1-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 1-3 shows a level optical interface.

Figure 1-2 Slanting optical interface
Slanting optical
interface
Figure 1-3 Level optical interface
Level optical
interface
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure

This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit
directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.
CAUTION
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas

The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,
the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10
meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.
l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden
area.
1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.
WARNING
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly
without eye protection.
Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser
transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has
very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the
eyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye
protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,
however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view
an un-terminated optical fiber.
Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers

To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:
l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the
required training courses.
l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off.
l Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source
is switched off.
l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not
exposed to laser radiation.
l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to
view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.
Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling

Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:

l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.
1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
WARNING
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.
When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple
aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.
1.7 Working at Heights

This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
WARNING
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.
The requirements for working at heights are as follows:
l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.
l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.
l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects
This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.
1.7.2 Using Ladders
This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects

This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

WARNING
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.
l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.
l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight-bearing capacity.
l Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.
l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the
lifting, as shown in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 Hoisting heavy objects
1.7.2 Using Ladders

This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder
is in good condition, you can use the ladder.
l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.
Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder
with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-5. When using a ladder, to prevent the
ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection
measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.
Figure 1-5 Slanting a ladder
Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:
l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.
l Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.
l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof
1.8 Mechanical Safety

This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
WARNING
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying
with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and
damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the
cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.
l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by
the splashing metal scraps.
l Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,
clean up the metallic scraps.
Sharp Objects
WARNING
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured
by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
l When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating
fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards
are damaged.
Carrying Heavy Objects

Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.
WARNING
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent
the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.
l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on
the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which
may hurt you.
l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person
carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and
move stably to avoid being strained.
l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,
and boards.
1.9 Other Precautions

This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.
Removing and Inserting a Board
CAUTION
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to
avoid distorting pins on the backplane.
l Slide the board along the guide rails.

l Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.
l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to
the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables
CAUTION
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.
Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin
of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.
l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before
installation.
l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform
any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.
High Temperature
WARNING
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the
flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,
you must wear the protection gloves.
IF Cables
WARNING
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
About This Chapter
This chapter provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment
damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of
microwave equipment.
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch

The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off
as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper
Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
or damage to the IF board and ODU.
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable
Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board
Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch

The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and off
as per the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch

The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the ODU,
as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch
O: OFF
I : ON
Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch

1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.

2. Turn it to the left.
3. Release the toggle lever switch.
Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch

1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch.

2. Turn it to the right.
3. Release the toggle lever switch.
2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper

Before removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the
Toggle Lever Switch.

1 2
DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF jumper.
Step 2 Remove or install the IF jumper.
----End
2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cable

Before removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the

DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF cable.
Step 2 Install or remove the IF cable.
----End
2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board

Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily injury
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide for the

1 2 3
DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF board.
Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.

Step 3 Remove or install the IF board.
----End

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 3 Commissioning Preparations
3 Commissioning Preparations
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the preparations that need to be made prior to commissioning equipment.
3.1 Preparing Documents and Tools

This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the
equipment.
3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method
By using the Web LCT for commissioning, engineers can adopt the single-hop commissioning
method or network commissioning method.
3.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions
Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to
performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both
scenarios.

3 Commissioning Preparations Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3.1 Preparing Documents and Tools

This section lists the document and tools that should be prepared prior to commissioning the
equipment.
Documents
The following document should be available before commissioning the equipment:
l Engineering design documents, including:
– Network plan
– Engineering design
l Commissioning guides, such as the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tools
Table 3-1 lists the tools required for the commissioning task.
Table 3-1 Tools and meters

Tool and Meter Application Scenario
l Adjustable wrench Aligning antennas

l Screwdriver
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter that has a test cable with a
BNC connector at one end
l North-stabilized indicator
Laptop on which the Web LCT is installed l Configuring site commissioning data by
using the Web LCT
l Querying the DCN status
l Testing the AM switching
Network cable tester Testing connectivity of network cables
l Optical power meter Checking connectivity of optical fibers

l Short fiber jumper
PC on which the Web LCT is installed Commissioning system items
NOTE
For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web
LCT User Guide.

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 3 Commissioning Preparations
3.2 Determining the Commissioning Method

By using the Web LCT for commissioning, engineers can adopt the single-hop commissioning
method or network commissioning method.
NOTE
In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system
commissioning are defined as follows:
l Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends of the
radio link by connecting the commissioning tool to the NE at a single site.
l System commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on all the NEs in the network by
connecting the commissioning tool to a gateway NE where it configures the commissioning data for
each site.
Single-hop Commissioning
The single-hop commissioning method is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission
networks (for example, a network with only one or two radio link hops). By performing single-
hop commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning items at a time. The
major commissioning steps are as follows:
1. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.
2. Use the Web LCT to configure all service data on the NEs.
3. Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.
4. Complete the system commissioning items.
Network Commissioning
The network commissioning method is usually used for large-scale microwave transmission
networks. The major commissioning steps are as follows:
1. On both ends of a radio link, power on the NEs.
2. Configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.
3. Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items at sites where services
converge.
4. Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items at sites where services
converge.
3.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions

Ensure that the equipment meets the commissioning requirements for the site or system prior to
performing such tasks. The following sections provide a non-exhaustive checklist for both
scenarios.
3.3.1 Site Commissioning

Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning.
3.3.2 System Commissioning
Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.

3 Commissioning Preparations Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3.3.1 Site Commissioning

Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for site commissioning.
Details about these requirements are as follows:
l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l Power is available to the equipment.
l The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment have been properly routed.
l The appropriate risk control measures to arrest falling objects and ensure personnel safety
are in place. Engineers are certified to commission the antennas.
l There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact
the commissioning.
3.3.2 System Commissioning

Ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.
Details about these requirements are as follows:
l Site commissioning at both ends of a radio link has been completed.
l There is no adverse weather (such as wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or impact
the commissioning.

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 4 Commissioning Process
4 Commissioning Process
About This Chapter
Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.
4.1 Site Commissioning Process

Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends
of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites
work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning.
4.2 System Commissioning Process
System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network.
System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection
functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.

4 Commissioning Process Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4.1 Site Commissioning Process

Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends
of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites
work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning.
You can use the following method to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN
950 on site:
l Web LCT
Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the

Web LCT)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on site
when they are:
l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950.
l Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.
l Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.
Table 4-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT
Commissioning Item Remarks
Powering On the Equipment Required
Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web Required

LCT
Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-Polarized Required when microwave

Antennas services are transmitted by
single-polarized antennas
Aligning Dual-Polarized Required when microwave

Antennas services are transmitted by
dual-polarized antennas
Querying the Status of Radio Links Required
Querying the DCN Status Required
NOTE
a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of the
radio link.
4.2 System Commissioning Process

System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission network.
System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection
functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 4 Commissioning Process
Table 4-2 System commissioning process

Commissioning Item Remarks
Configuring Network-wide Service Data Required
Testing Ethernet Services Required when Ethernet services are

available
Testing AM Switching Required when the AM function is enabled
Testing Protection Testing IF 1+1 Required when the radio links are configured
Switching Switching with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
Testing ERPS Required when ERPS protection is

Protection configured
Switching
Checking the Clock Status Required

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 5 Site Commissioning
5 Site Commissioning
About This Chapter
Site commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all site commissioning
items.
5.1 Powering On the Equipment

By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system
of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.
5.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT
This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to
perform site commissioning.
5.3 Testing Connectivity of Cables
During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces
incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test
connectivity of the cables.
5.4 Aligning the Antennas
Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has
a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.
5.5 Checking the Status of Radio Links
After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links
are in the normal state.
5.6 Querying the DCN Status
The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the HOP
management function, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.

5 Site Commissioning Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5.1 Powering On the Equipment

By checking the power-on process of equipment, you can verify whether the hardware system
of the equipment and the power system are functioning properly.
Prerequisite
l Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l The power system is available. The voltage, pole connection, and fuse current of the power
system have been checked in the process of connecting power cables.
l The power supply (for example, the power box of the cabinet) has been turned off.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

None.
Context
l For the OptiX RTN 950, the recommended fuse currents are listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Fuse currents
Chassis Fuse Current
OptiX RTN 950 ≥ 20 A
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following system control, switching, and timing board:
Chassis Board Type
OptiX RTN 950 CSH
Precautions
CAUTION
l If the equipment is configured with two PIU boards, the nominal voltage for the input power
of each PIU board must be the same.
l The ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the IF board is designed with a locking device.
Hence, you must pull out the switches lightly before you turn it. If the switch points to "O",
the switch is turned off. If the switch points to "I", the switch is turned on.
l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not power on
the cabinet. First, reconstruct the power supply and then test the output voltage again.

Procedure
Step 1 Check and ensure that the power cables of the chassis are correctly connected. Then, power on
the equipment and check the status of the indicators. In normal conditions, the PIU and FAN
indicators are steady green, as shown in Figure 5-1. Table 5-2 provides the descriptions for the
different states of the indicators.
Table 5-2 Status of indicators
Indicator State Description
PWR Steady green Indicates that the power supply is in

the normal state.
Off Indicates a power failure.
FAN Steady green Indicates that the fan is running

properly.
Steady red Indicates that the fan is faulty.
Off Indicates that the fan is powered off.
Figure 5-1 Normal state

PIU indicator FAN indicator
Step 2 Check the status of the indicators on the system control, switching, and timing board and ensure
that the equipment is powered on. The board indicators should conform to the following states
and sequences.
1. The PROG indicator should be green, off, green. The process lasts about 1 minute if service
data is not configured.
NOTE
This process lasts longer if service data is configured.

2. The STAT and SYNC indicators should be green.

Figure 5-2 Normal state
ACTC
ACTX
SYNC
PROG
STAT
NOTE
l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU hardware description.
l For a board other than the system control, switching, and timing board on the IDU, the STAT indicator is
on only after the corresponding logical board is added.
Step 3 Turn the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board to "I".

NOTE
l The ODU indicator on an IF board is green only after the logical board of the IF board connected to
the ODU and the logical board of the ODU are created.
l In the event of indicator abnormalities, contact Huawei technical support.
----End
5.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the

Web LCT
This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data when using the Web LCT to
perform site commissioning.

Configuration Process
Figure 5-3 describes the process of configuring site commissioning data.

Figure 5-3 Configuration flowchart

Start
Connecting the Web LCT to

the IDU
Creating NEs
Logging in to an NE
Changing NE IDs
Changing NE names
Setting NE communication
parameters
Configuring logical boards
Procedure for configuring an Synchronizing NE time Procedure for configuring an

IP radio link (XPIC enabled) IP radio link (XPIC disabled)
Creating an IF 1+1
Creating an XPIC group protection group
Setting the AM attributes of Configuring the IF/ODU

the XPIC hybrid radio link information of a radio link
Creating an IF 1+1 protection

group Checking alarms
Configuring the IF/ODU

information of a radio link End
Checking alarms
Mandatory
5-6 End Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Optional Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Procedure for Configuring NE Data
Table 5-3 Procedure for configuring NE data
Step Action Description
1 Connecting the Web LCT to Mandatory.

the IDU
2 Creating NEs by Using the Mandatory. It is recommended that you

Search Method create an NE in IP Auto Discovery mode.
3 Logging In to an NE Mandatory.
Enter correct values in User Name and
Password. The default User Name is lct,
and the default Password is password.
4 Changing the NE ID Mandatory. Set parameters as follows:

l Set ID according to the guideline
specified in the DCN plan.
l If a specific extended NE ID is required,
change Extended ID.
5 Changing the NE Name Optional.
6 Setting NE Communication Mandatory if special requirements are

Parameters imposed on the IP address of the NE. Set
IP and Subnet Mask as required.
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed
manually, the IP address changes to
0x81000000 + NE ID.
7 Configuring Logical Boards Mandatory.
8 Synchronizing NE Time Mandatory. This operation synchronizes

NE time with the time on the computer that
runs the Web LCT.
Procedure for Configuring an IP Radio Link (XPIC Disabled)
Table 5-4 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)
1 8.2.1 Mandatory when radio links are configured with 1+1

Creating an protection.
IF 1+1 Set the parameters according to the network plan.
Protection
Groupa

2 8.2.4 Mandatory.
Configuring l Set IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network
the IF/ODU plan.
Information
of a Radio l If the AM function is required, set AM Status to
Link Disabled for commissioning. In addition, set Manual
Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity according to the network plan.
l If the AM function is not required, set AM Status to
Disabled. Set Manual Modulation Mode to the
modulation mode according to the network plan.
l Set Link ID according to the network plan.
l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX
Power(dBm) according to the network plan.
l Set TX Status to Unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal
level (RSL) specified in the network plan. The antenna
misalignment indication function is enabled only after this
parameter is set. When the antenna misalignment
indication function is enabled, if the actual RSL of the
ODU is 3 dB or more beyond the range of the preset
receive power, the ODU indicator on the IF board
connected to the ODU blinks yellow (on and off at
intervals of 300 ms), indicating that the antennas are not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive
minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna
misalignment indication function.
3 Checking Mandatory.
Alarms
NOTE
For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD protection, configure the IF and ODU information only for the
main radio link. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD protection, configure the IF and ODU information for
the main radio link and the ODU information for the standby radio link.
Procedure for Configuring an IP Radio Link (XPIC Enabled)
Table 5-5 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)

1 8.2.2 Mandatory.
Creating an Set the parameters according to the network plan.
XPIC
Workgroup

2 8.2.3 Setting Mandatory. Set parameters as follows:

the AM l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM
Attributes Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manual Modulation
of the XPIC Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM
Workgroup Capacity according to the network plan.
l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Status to
Disabled. Set Manual Modulation Mode to the
modulation mode according to the network plan.
l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and
vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.
3 8.2.1 Mandatory when two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1

Creating an +1 protection groups.
IF 1+1 Set the parameters according to the network plan.
Protection
NOTE
Group One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The radio
link in the horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the XPIC
workgroup can form a 1+1 protection group with the radio link in the
horizontal/vertical polarization direction of the other XPIC
workgroup.
4 8.2.4 Mandatory. Configure the IF and ODU information in both

Configuring horizontal and vertical polarization directions. Set parameters
the IF/ODU as follows:
Information l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the RSL specified in
of a Radio the network plan. The antenna misalignment indication
Link function is enabled only after this parameter is set. When
the antenna misalignment indication function is enabled,
if the actual RSL of the ODU is 3 dB or more beyond the
preset receive power, the ODU indicator on the IF board
connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on and 300
ms off), indicating that the antennas are not aligned. After
the antennas are aligned for 30 consecutive minutes, the
NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment
indication function.
l Power to Be Received(dBm) must be the same in the
horizontal and vertical polarization directions.
5 Checking Mandatory.
Alarms
NOTE
For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD protection, configure the IF and ODU information only of the
main radio link. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD protection, configure the IF and ODU information of
the main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.

5.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU

Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration and
for other commissioning items.
Prerequisite
The equipment is powered on.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.
Step 2 Set the IP address of the laptop.
The IP address of the laptop should meet the following requirements:
l The IP address of the laptop is in the same network segment (the default network segment
is 129.9.0.0) as the NE, but their IP addresses are different.
l The subnet mask for the IP address of the laptop is the same as that for the IP address of the
NE (the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0).
l The default gateway IP address is blank.
Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the NMS/COM port on the
system control, switching, and timing board.
NMS/COM
CAUTION
Ensure that the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port of the laptop and the
NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Otherwise, the equipment
or test tool may be damaged.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port on the system control, switching, and timing board supports the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode.
Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can both be used to set up a connection.

At this point, the indicators at the Ethernet port and the NMS/COM port are on (green). A
message will be displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if the
operating system has been configured to do so. If the operating system displays a message
indicating an IP address conflict, change the IP address.
Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer as the default browser.
Step 5 Optional: Set the security level of the Internet Explorer to medium or lower.
Step 6 Optional: Disable the Pop-up Blocker.
NOTE
If plug-ins that can block pop-up windows are also installed, disable their blocking function.
Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the Internet Explorer.

1. Run the Internet Explorer.
2. Choose Tool > Internet Options from the main menu of the Internet Explorer.
3. On the General tab, click Settings in the Temporary Internet files area.
4. In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and then
click OK.
5. After being returned to the General tab, click OK.
Step 8 On the desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon.
The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.
Step 9 Enter the values of User Name and Password, and then click Login.
l User Name: admin
l Password: admin
If the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in the
Internet Explorer.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
If logins to the USER LOGIN window or the NE List page fail, perform Step 4 through Step
7 again.
5.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning. It is
recommended that you select the IP Auto discovery mode.
Prerequisite
l The communication between the NMS and the NE is in the normal state.
l The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In NE List, click NE Search.
The Search NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select the IP Auto Discovery mode.
NOTE
In the IP Auto Discovery mode, the Web LCT searches for the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs that are
managed by the gateway NE in the network segment where the server resides.
Step 3 Click Search.

Step 4 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

Step 5 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully.
Step 6 Click OK.

A new NE has been added to the NE list.
Step 7 Click Cancel.
----End
5.2.3 Logging In to an NE
After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.
Prerequisite
l The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.
l The NE to be managed is already created in NE List.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.
TIP
You can select multiple NEs at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

NOTE
l The default User Name is lct.

l The default Password for user lct is password.
Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed
from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.
Step 3 Click NE Explorer.

The NE Explorer is displayed.
TIP
To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.

TIP
l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout
diagram.
l Click to collapse/expand the legend.
----End
5.2.4 Changing the NE ID

Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan and ensure that each NE ID is unique.
Modifying the NE ID does not interrupt services.
Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE
Attribute from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.
The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.
Step 4 Click OK.

Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed for confirmation.
----End
5.2.5 Changing the NE Name

For ease of identification, name the NE according to the NE's geographical location or the device
connected to the NE.
Prerequisite
The NE user has the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE
Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in the Name field.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot contain any spaces or Chinese characters.

Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
5.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters

If special requirements are imposed on the IP address, change the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway NE of the NE.
Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.
Step 3 Click Apply.
NOTE
l If configuring multiple parameters, click Apply for each instance.

l If the new IP address in the IP field is not in the original network segment, reset the IP address of the Web
LCT and ensure that it is in the same segment as the new IP address of the NE. Otherwise, the NE is
unreachable to the Web LCT.

----End
5.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards

Add the logical board in the slot layout if it has not already been added. If the physical board is
inconsistent with the logical board in the slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and
add the correct logical board.
Prerequisite
l All the boards are installed correctly.
l The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is turned on and the communication between the
IDU and the ODU is normal.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards.
Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required
but are not yet configured for certain physical boards.
Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click and select Add XXX. "XXX"
is the name of the board to be added.
Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click and select Delete.
1. Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed for confirmation.
2. A dialog box is displayed again for confirmation. Click OK.

NOTE
Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, and protection, on the board.
----End
5.2.8 Synchronizing NE Time

Adjust the NE time so that the NE time is synchronized with the time on the NMS. In this manner,
the NMS can accurately record the time when an alarm, a performance event, or an abnormal
event occurred.
Prerequisite
l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.
l Time settings on the Web LCT are correct.
l The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > NE Time
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized and choose Synchronize with NM
Time from the shortcut menu.

----End
5.2.9 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

If the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1
+1 protection group.
Prerequisite
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
Slot Layout.
l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in the paired slots.

Web LCT
Background Information
When a 1+0 service is converted into 1+1 HSB protection by configuring an IF 1+1 protection
group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service exists,
however, needs to be set to the working board.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
Step 3 Click New.

The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.

NOTE
It is recommended to set the parameters for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection as follows:
l Set Working Mode according to the network plan.
l Set Revertive Mode to Revertive.
l Set WTR Time(s) to the default value.
l Set Enable Reverse Switching according to the network planning information. When Working Mode is
HSB, set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; when Working Mode is SD, set Enable Reverse
Switching to Enabled; when Working Mode is FD, Enable Reverse Switching is invalid.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
5.2.10 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link

By performing this operation, you can configure the IF/ODU information for a radio link.
Prerequisite
Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Precautions
l In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In
this case, configure only the IF/ODU information of the main device.
l In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this
case, configure the IF/ODU information of the active device and the ODU information of
the standby device.
l In the case of one XPIC radio link, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links.
The IF/ODU information of the two radio links in different polarization directions should
be separately configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.

Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or
ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.
Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

NOTE
The recommended settings for the parameters are as follows:

l Set Link ID and IF Channel Bandwidth according to the network planning information.
l Set AM Enable Status to Disabled and set this parameter according to the network planning
information after per-NE commissioning.
l After setting AM Enable Status to Disabled, set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is originally planned.
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

NOTE

l Set TX Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) according to the network planning information.
l Set TX Power(dBm) according to the network planning information. The value of this parameter should
not be higher than the rated maximum transmit power of the ODU.
l Set TX Status to Unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the network planning information. The antenna misalignment
indication function is enabled only after this parameter is set.
Step 7 Click Apply.
----End
5.2.11 Creating an XPIC Workgroup

If you configure two XPIC radio links after binding the two radio links as an XPIC workgroup,
the parameter settings including the channel bandwidth, transmit frequency, transmit power, and
ATPC attribute are the same for the two radio links.
Prerequisite
l The ISX2 boards and the ODUs to which the ISX2 boards are connected must be added on
the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The Create XPIC Protection Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC protection group.

NOTE

l Set IF Channel Bandwidth, Polarization direction-V, Polarization direction-H, Link ID-V, Link ID-
H, Transmit Power(dBm), Maximum Transmit Power(dBm), Transmission Frequency(MHz), and T/
R Spacing(MHz) according to the network planning information.
l Set Transmission Status to Unmute.
l Set ATPC Enabled to Disabled and set this parameter according to the network plan after per-NE
commissioning.
l Set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) according to the network planning
information. It is recommended you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the value that is 10 dB higher
than the planned central value of the upper and lower thresholds, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to
the value that is 10 dB lower than the planned central value of the upper and lower thresholds.
l Set ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status according to the network planning information. If this
parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio link.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
5.2.12 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup

After the XPIC Workgroup is created, you need to configure the AM attributes of the XPIC IP
radio link according to the planned values.
Prerequisite
l The XPIC protection group has been created.


Web LCT
The XPIC IF board ISX2 supports IP radio, and the AM attributes can be configured.
Procedure
Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab.
Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC radio link.
NOTE

l If the AM function is enabled for the XPIC link, set AM Status to Disabled and Manual Modulation
Mode to Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity as planned during site commissioning.
l If the AM function is disabled, set AM Status to Disabled and Manual Modulation Mode to the planned
modulation mode.
l AM parameters must be the same in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions of the XPIC link.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
5.2.13 Checking Alarms

By checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can determine whether the equipment
is working properly.
Prerequisite
l The equipment is connected to the Web LCT.
l Data configuration is complete.

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click on the toolbar.
Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab.
Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.

Check whether there are any equipment alarms, the following alarms in particular:
l POWER_ALM
l FAN_FAIL
l HARD_BAD
l BD_STATUS
l SYNC_C_LOS
l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
l NESF_LOST
l TEMP_ALARM
l IF_CABLE_OPEN
l XPIC_LOS
For details about the preceding alarms and about how to handle them, refer to the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
----End
5.3 Testing Connectivity of Cables

During the installation of the OptiX RTN 900, the cables may be connected to service interfaces
incorrectly, or the hardware may malfunction. To ensure that the services run properly, test
connectivity of the cables.
5.3.1 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables

By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in
the normal state.
5.3.2 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection
During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be
excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check
the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution
frame (ODF).
5.3.1 Testing Connectivity of Network Cables

By testing connectivity of network cables, you can determine whether the network cables are in
the normal state.
Prerequisite
The network cables are already made.


Network cable tester
You can also test the connectivity of a network cable by performing a loopback on the data ports
(this method is applicable when the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the network
cable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports turn
on, it indicates that the network cable is in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network cable to the port of the network cable tester.
Figure 5-4 Testing the Ethernet service cable
Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester.
Network Cable End A End B

Straight-through cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on The 1-8-G indicators turn on one after
one after another. another.
Crossover cable The 1-8-G indicators turn on The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicators
one after another. turn on one after another.
Step 3 Connect the network cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device.
----End
5.3.2 Checking Fiber Jumper Connection

During installation, the fiber jumpers may be incorrectly connected or the attenuation may be
excessively high. As a result, services will fail to run properly. To prevent this situation, check
the connection after the fiber jumper is routed from the optical interface to the optical distribution
frame (ODF).

Prerequisite
The fiber jumper is installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.
The equipment is powered on.

l Optical power meter
l Short fiber jumper
Precautions
DANGER
When you are checking the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser
beams.
Connection Diagram
When you use an SFP optical module to test the fiber jumper connection, connect the fiber
jumper to the optical power meter on the ODF side and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port
of the SFP optical module on the chassis side. Figure 5-5 shows the connection.
Figure 5-5 Connection diagram for checking the fiber connection by using an SFP optical
module
External
Cable
TX RX
ODF
Fiber jumper connected

to the TX port
Procedure
Step 1 On the chassis side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the SFP optical module.

Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the TX port of the SFP optical module with a short fiber
jumper.
Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the type of
optical interface. The measured launched optical power of the SFP optical module is A.
Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back into the TX port.
Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to the
optical power meter. The measured optical power is B.
Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of the SFP optical module. The optical power
meter reads "LO" and does not receive any optical signals.
Step 7 Compare the values of A and B.

l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is
correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range.
l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, check and ensure that the fiber jumper
is in good condition and is correctly routed. Then, check and ensure that the fiber jumper
terminal is clean.
CAUTION
If the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B should be less
than 2 dB. Otherwise, it indicates that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation
of the fiber jumper is not within the normal range. Check and ensure that the fiber jumper is in
good condition and is correctly routed. Then, check and ensure that the fiber jumper terminal is
clean.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port.
Step 9 Restore the fiber jumper connections on the chassis side and the ODF side.
Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to check fiber jumper connections of other optical interfaces and then
restore the connections when completed.
----End
5.4 Aligning the Antennas

Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment has
a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.
5.4.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes

Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge
of the main lobe and side lobes
5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas
When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.
5.4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas

When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
5.4.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes

Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related knowledge
of the main lobe and side lobes
Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobes

The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences
of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontal
azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the vertical
section. Figure 5-6 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobe
with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein the
first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.
Figure 5-6 Main lobe and side lobes
Main lobe
First side lobe
Second side lobe
Locating the Main Lobe

Antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main lobe
of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the opposite
antenna reach the maximum value.
The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For instance,
in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9° when
the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignment
adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.
Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level. Whether
the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks.
Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak.
Figure 5-7 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric
rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.

Figure 5-7 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna

180o
90o
0o
Center of the main lobe
Outer edge of the main lobe, 3-

180o 10 dB lower than the main lobe
Trough between the main lobe
and the first side lobe, 30 dB
lower than the main lobe
90o First side lobe, 20-25 dB
lower than the main lobe
Trough between the first side lobe

and the second side lobe, 30 dB
0o or more lower than the main lobe
Second side lobe, where
a Horizontal section of signals are very weak
b Head-on view
the antenna
Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are
tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 5-8 shows a horizontal radio propagation
model of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the
measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU).
Figure 5-8 Three tracking paths

Head-on view of tracking paths for
different elevations Signal levels for each path
6 7
C C'
C 6 7 C' 5
4
4 5
B B'
B B'
1 2 3
A A'
2
1 3
A A'

l Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main
lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth
of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.
The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the
signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be
mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth
of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the
elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the
elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe
and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point
6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result,
points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct
method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust
the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust
the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown
in Figure 5-9, a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD', or top to bottom
along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal.
The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in
the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the three signal peaks of
line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown
in Figure 5-8 until the peak signal appears.
Figure 5-9 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E
1
2
D D'
1 2
D D'
1
3
3
E E'
E'
5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas

When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
Prerequisite
l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.

l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain,
snow, or fog.
l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and
the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.
l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

l Adjustable wrench
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests)
Precautions
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end,
power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennas
are aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends.
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas in the following sequence:
1. Power on the main ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during the
alignment.
2. Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends.
3. Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna
at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.
4. Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna
at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.
l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align
the antenna in the following sequence:
1. Power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align the main antennas
at both ends.
2. Power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align the diversity
antennas at both ends.
CAUTION
You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts or
screws. For details, see the installation guide for the antennas.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the
antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.

Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at the
local end and test the voltage value VBNC.
TIP
It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advance,
because it is more convenient for testing the voltage value VBNC.
Figure 5-10 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter
Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:

1. Keep the remote antenna fixed.
2. Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in the
horizontal direction.
When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows:
l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 5-8. In this case, adjust
the azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8.
l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 5-8. In this case, adjust
the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 5-8. Then,
adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA'
can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8.
l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 5-8. In this case, adjust the
azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 5-8. Then,
adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA'
can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8.

3. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-8 until VBNC
reaches the peak within the tracked range.
4. Adjust the antenna until the VBNC voltage reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna at
the local end.
NOTE
When you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value.
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak
value, tighten the antenna at the remote end.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remote
end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends
Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. Obtain the current RSL by referring to the relation
curve between VBNC of ODUs and the RSLs at both ends.
NOTE
The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the ODU.
The actual RSL must be the same as the value planned by the network planning department.
NOTE
l If VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Maintenance Guide for suggestion on how to handle the issue.
Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. The ODU indicator should turn off. If the ODU
indicator blinks yellow, align the antennas.
Step 8 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.

NOTE
Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process
of tightening the screws.
----End
5.4.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas

When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
Prerequisite
l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.
l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of rain,
snow, or fog
l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude and
the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.
l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

l Adjustable wrench

l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter (with a BNC connector prepared at one end for future tests)
Procedure
Step 1 Check the installation modes of the ODUs at both ends of the radio link.
If... Then...
The ODUs are directly installed onto an OMT Proceed to Step 2.
The ODUs are installed separately from the antenna Proceed to Step 3 through Step 13.
Step 2 Perform the following to align the dual-polarized antennas.

1. Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the
horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
horizontally polarized signals.
2. Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to
5.4.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the
horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna.
3. Power on the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link.
4. Tighten all the screws on the antennas.
NOTE
Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the
process of tightening the screws.
Step 3 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the
horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
horizontally polarized signals.
Step 4 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 5.4.2
Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontally
polarized signals is aligned with the antenna.
Step 5 Measure the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized
ODU.
2. Calculate the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the
curve diagram delivered along with the ODU.
Step 6 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals
reaches the lower threshold (P2).
1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized
ODU.
3. Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram
in the ODU box.

4. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).
If... Then...
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is less than 30 dB Proceed to the next step.
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 7.
5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should
not be less than 30 dB.
Step 7 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.
Step 8 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the
vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
vertically polarized signals.
Step 9 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step
5.
Step 10 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signals
reaches the lower threshold (P4).
1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized
ODU.
3. Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram
delivered along with the ODU.
4. Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).
If... Then...
The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is less than 30 dB Proceed to the next step.
The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is not less than 30 dB Perform Step 11.
5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should
not be less than 30 dB.
Step 11 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.
Step 12 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 are
not less than 30 dB.
NOTE
If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.
Step 13 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.

NOTE
Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the process
of tightening the screws.
----End

Related Information
In practice, you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized
signals.
5.5 Checking the Status of Radio Links

After aligning the antennas, query the status of radio links and determine whether the radio links
are in the normal state.
Prerequisite
The antennas have been aligned.
Procedure
Step 1 Observe the LINK indicator on the IF board.
1. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (green), it indicates that the radio link is in the
normal state.
2. If the LINK indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration of
the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.
----End

5.6 Querying the DCN Status

The NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. By querying the radio links using the HOP
management function, you can determine whether the DCN of the radio links runs properly.
Prerequisite
l The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.
l The antennas have been aligned.
l The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Link
Step 2 In the IF/ODU Configuration tab, select and right-click the required IF board. Then, choose
HOP Management from the shortcut menu.
l If a hop management window is displayed as shown in Figure 5-11, the DCN of the radio
links runs properly.
Figure 5-11 Hop management

l If the dialog box is displayed as The opposite NE does not exist, check the data
configurations.
----End

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 6 System Commissioning
6 System Commissioning
About This Chapter
System commissioning includes the specific commissioning processes for all system
commissioning items.
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data

After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication
between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the Web LCT, and the
network-wide service data can be configured.
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services
By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested by using the ETH-OAM function. Using this
method, an Ethernet tester is not required.
6.3 Testing AM Switching
If no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio
links.
6.4 Testing Protection Switching
By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal
over radio links.
6.5 Checking the Clock Status
Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network
are synchronized.

6 System Commissioning Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data

After site commissioning is performed for each hop of the radio links, the ECC communication
between NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the Web LCT, and the
network-wide service data can be configured.
NOTE
For detailed procedures of configuring network-wide service data, see 7 Configuring Networkwide Service
Data.
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services

By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
radio links. The Ethernet services can be tested by using the ETH-OAM function. Using this
method, an Ethernet tester is not required.
Prerequisite
Ethernet services have been configured.
NOTE
It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM
function works in the highest-efficiency modulation mode.

Web LCT
Test Connection Diagram

This section uses the point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet services between port 2
on NE 2 and port 1 on NE 1 as an example, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services
PORT 1
PORT 2
RNC NE 1 NE 2 NodeB
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains (MDs) of NE 1 and NE 2.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

2. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure the parameters of the new MDs.
l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE 1 and NE 2
l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE 1 and NE 2
NOTE
The MD names and the MD levels of the NEs must be the same.
4. Click OK.
Step 2 Configure the maintenance associations (MAs) of NE 1 and NE 2.

2. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
The New Maintenance Association dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure the parameters of the new MAs.
l Maintenance Association Name: MA1 for NE 1 and NE 2
l Relevant Service: services from NE 1 to NE 2
NOTE
Click in Relevant Service, and select relevant services in the New Maintenance
Association dialog box.
4. Click OK.
Step 3 Configure the maintenance association end points (MEPs) of NE 1 and NE 2.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.
4. Configure the parameters of the new MEPs.
l MP ID: 101 for NE 1, and 102 for NE 2
l Direction: ingress for NE 1 and NE 2
l CC Status: activation for NE 1 and NE 2

5. Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the MAs of NE 1 and NE 2.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.
The Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.
5. Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs.
l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 for NE 1, and 101 for NE 2
NOTE
Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE 1 to the MP ID of NE 2, and set the Remote
Maintenance Point ID of NE 2 to the MP ID of NE 1.
6. Click OK.
Step 5 Test availability of the Ethernet services from NE 1 to NE 2.

1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE 1, and choose
Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM.
2. Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to port 1, and click OAM.
3. Select Start LB.
The LB Test window is displayed.
4. Select MP ID, and set the parameters in Test Node.
l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE 1)
l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE 2)

l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)

l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended; the parameter can also be set to 128,
256, 512, 1024, or 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different packet lengths.)
NOTE
The maximum packet length is 1400.

l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)
5. Click Start Test.

6. Check Detection Result.
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.
----End
6.3 Testing AM Switching

If no BER tester is available, you can test AM switching by querying the bit errors over radio
links.
Prerequisite
l The radio links are the IP radio links for which the AM function is enabled.
l Weather conditions are good.

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.
1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab.
3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Specified Modulation
Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE.
1. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.
3. In Monitored Object Filter Condition, select All.
4. Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute.
5. In Count, select FEC Performance. In Display Options, select Zero Data and
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Second.
6. Click Query.
In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0. If the
value is not 0, choose Reset on the performance register to clear the existing performance
values.
Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

3. Click Query.
Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Specified Modulation Mode of
a pre-set value.
Step 4 Reset the performance event register.

1. Select the desired IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.
3. Click Reset.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed.
4. Click OK.
Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.


3. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the planned
values.
4. Click Apply.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board
on the local NE.
In performance events, the value of FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT should be 0.
Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

3. Click Query.
Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity of a preset value.
NOTE
When adverse weather prevails, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
----End
6.4 Testing Protection Switching

By testing protection switching, you can determine whether the protection switching is normal
over radio links.
6.4.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching

You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the
working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.
6.4.2 Testing ERPS Switching
You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of
the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.
6.4.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching

You can verify whether the IF 1+1 protection function is in the normal state by checking the
working board of the IF 1+1 protection group before and after the switching.
Prerequisite
l The equipment is configured with IF 1+1 protection.
l Ethernet services are configured.


l Web LCT
Figure 6-2 Configuration for testing IF 1+1 switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:
l Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3
l Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5
l Main ODU: ODU in slot 23
l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25
NE A NE B
As shown in Figure 6-2, the following procedures use the Ethernet services between NE A and
NE B that are configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example.
NOTE
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU
on the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Disable. The switching
occurs at NE A.
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs
at NE A.
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to Mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.
Precautions
NOTE
You can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board of Channel in Protection Group
before the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A.
1. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
3. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse
Switching to Enable.

4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
3. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.
4. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board
3-ISU2.
Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 Refer to 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of the Ethernet services.
Step 5 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
3. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and click Query.
4. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board
5-ISU2.
Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.
Step 7 Restore the setting of Enable Reverse Switching in Step 1.
1. Select the desired NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and choose
3. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse
Switching to Disable.
4. Click Apply.
----End

6.4.2 Testing ERPS Switching

You can verify whether the ERPS function is in the normal state by checking the port status of
the ERPS protection group before and after the switching.
Prerequisite
l The equipment is configured with ERPS.
l The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of ERPS is
properly connected.

Web LCT

As shown in Figure 6-3, the following procedures use the Ethernet services that are configured
with ERPS between NE A and NE D as an example. The owner node is NE D.
Figure 6-3 Configuration for testing ERPS

NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D are configured as follows:
l Main IF board: ISU2 in slot 3
l Standby IF board: ISU2 in slot 5
l Main ODU: ODU in slot 23
l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 25

East West
NE B
Protection channel East
West
NE A NE D
East
West
Working channel
NE C
West
East
Procedure
Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.
3. The value of Status of State Machine should be Idle.
Step 3 Set TX Status to Mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Mute.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and click Query.
3. The value of Status of State Machine should be Protection.
Step 6 Set TX Status to Unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.

3. Select the desired ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.
----End
6.5 Checking the Clock Status

Check the clock status for each NE to ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on a radio network
are synchronized.
Prerequisite
The clock configuration is complete. The link that transmits clocks is in the normal state.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query.

NOTE
l If the clock of an NE is selected as the working clock of the radio network, this clock should be in free-
run mode and the clocks of the other NEs should be in locked mode.
l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the working clock of the radio network, the clocks
of all the NEs should be in locked mode.

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network.
----End

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
About This Chapter
Services can be transmitted in IP radio mode only after networkwide service data is configured.
7.1 Basic Concepts

Before configuring networkwide service data, you need to be familiar with related basic
concepts.
7.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedures for configuring networks, radio links, Ethernet services,
and clocks.
7.3 Configuration Example (Ring Network Based on Point-to-Point Transparent Transmission)
This section describes how to configure an IP radio ring network operating in point-to-point
transparent transmission mode according to the network plan.
7.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links with XPIC Enabled)
This section describes how to configure IP radio links with cross polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) enabled, according to the network plan.

7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7.1 Basic Concepts

Before configuring networkwide service data, you need to be familiar with related basic
concepts.
7.1.1 DCN
The network management system (NMS) communicates with a transmission network element
(NE) through the data communication network (DCN) to manage and maintain the NE.
7.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE
The gateway NE (GNE) refers to the NE whose application layer communicates directly with
the application layer of the NMS. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer
communicates with the application layer of the NMS by forwarding data through the application
layer of its GNE.
7.1.3 ID and IP Address of an NE
The ID and IP address are the unique identifiers of an NE on the DCN.
7.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards
The NE software considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the
physical board. The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when
managing the physical board.
7.1.5 Adaptive Modulation
Adaptive modulation (AM) is a technology wherein the modulation scheme can be adjusted
automatically based on channel quality.
7.1.6 CCDP and XPIC
The CCDP and XPIC are two technologies that are developed based on microwave polarization
characteristics. The CCDP, wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization
waves, doubles the transmission capacity; the XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference
between the two polarization waves.
7.1.7 RF Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 950 supports four RF configuration modes, namely, 1+0 non-protection
configuration, N+0 non-protection configuration, 1+1 protection configuration, and cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration.
7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers
On the NMS, Ethernet ports are represented by PORTs.
7.1.9 IF_ETH Port
IP radio IF boards use their IF_ETH ports to receive services from and transmit services to the
packet plane.
7.1.10 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported
working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information
that the opposite end may transfer.
7.1.11 Flow Control Function
When the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port due to poor data processing/
transferring capability, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets
caused by buffer overflow, proper flow control measures must be taken.
7.1.12 Clock Source

A clock source is a signal source that carries the timing reference information. An NE implements
clock synchronization, by using its phase locked loop (PLL) to lock the timing information of
the clock source.
7.1.13 Clock Protection Modes
The OptiX RTN 950 supports clock source protection based on priorities, synchronization status
message (SSM) protection, and extended SSM protection.
7.1.14 Clock Synchronization Policy
Users should plan a proper clock synchronization policy according to the network topology.
7.1.1 DCN
The network management system (NMS) communicates with a transmission network element
(NE) through the data communication network (DCN) to manage and maintain the NE.
Overview
On a DCN, both the NMS and NEs are nodes of the DCN. The DCN between the NMS and NEs
is called an external DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called an internal DCN. The OptiX
RTN 950 supports several DCN solutions, including Huawei embedded control channel
(HWECC), IP over DCC, and inband DCN. The IP over DCC solution and the inband DCN
solution are the most common for DCN.
IP over DCC Solution

Figure 7-1 shows how network management messages are transmitted in the IP over DCC
solution. Different vendors' network management messages encapsulated in the IP protocol stack
are transmitted through DCCs carried by optical fibers or microwave, or are transmitted over
the Ethernet between Ethernet network management ports or between NE cascading ports.
Figure 7-1 IP over DCC solution
OptiX Msg 3rd-party Msg 3rd-party Msg

IP stack IP stack IP stack
3rd-party Msg DCC DCC ETH
IP stack
ETH
Third-party NMS
3rd-party Msg
IP stack
OptiX Msg OptiX Msg 3rd-party Msg ETH
OptiX NMS IP stack IP stack IP stack
ETH DCC DCC
OptiX equipment Third-party equipment
Ethernet link Fiber Radio link

Inband DCN Solution

In the inband DCN solution, network management messages are transmitted over IP radio or
through FE/GE ports, occupying part of the Ethernet service bandwidth, as shown in Figure
7-2.
Figure 7-2 Inband DCN solution

OptiX Msg
OptiX Msg
IP
IP
IP MW
IP MW
OptiX Msg
IP
FE/GE
OptiX Msg OptiX Msg

IP IP
FE/GE FE/GE
NMS
OptiX Msg
IP
FE/GE
OptiX RTN 910/950 Layer 2 Switch Ethernet link
Comparison Between the IP over DCC Solution and the Inband DCN Solution
Table 7-1 compares the IP over DCC solution and the inband DCN solution.
Table 7-1 Comparison Between the IP over DCC Solution and the Inband DCN Solution
DCN Solution Advantage Disadvantage
IP over DCC In the IP over DCN solution, There is limited DCN

DCN information is bandwidth available.
transmitted over microwave DCN information cannot be
DCCs, without occupying transmitted through FE/GE
service bandwidth. ports.

DCN Solution Advantage Disadvantage
Inband DCN In the inband DCN solution, Part of service bandwidth is

DCN information is occupied.
transmitted through VLAN resources are
microwave or FE/GE ports. occupied.
Therefore, this solution is
applicable to more scenarios.
There is sufficient DCN
bandwidth (512 kbit/s by
default) available. In
addition, bandwidth
expansion is supported.
7.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE

The gateway NE (GNE) refers to the NE whose application layer communicates directly with
the application layer of the NMS. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer
communicates with the application layer of the NMS by forwarding data through the application
layer of its GNE.
GNE
Generally, the GNE is connected to the NMS through a LAN/WAN. The application layer of
the NMS can directly communicate with the application layer of the GNE. One set of NMS
needs to be connected to one or more GNEs.
Disable the extended ECC function of the GNEs, to prevent oversized DCN that is caused due
to the ECC communication between the GNEs.
Non-GNE
A non-GNE communicates with the GNE through the DCN channels between NEs. It is
recommended that fewer than 50 non-GNEs are affiliated to a GNE.
7.1.3 ID and IP Address of an NE

The ID and IP address are the unique identifiers of an NE on the DCN.
ID of an NE
At the application layer of each DCN solution, the NE uses the NE ID as the address of the NE.
Hence, the ID of each NE on the DCN must be unique and complies with the uniform DCN
planning.
The NE ID has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and
the lowest 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet
ID of the NE is 9 and the basic ID is 1.
IP Address of an NE
An NE uses the IP address as its unique identifier during the TCP/IP communication.

In the DCN solutions (for example, IP over DCC and inband DCN) where the NM message is
transmitted over TCP/IP, the IP address of an NE is used as the NE address at the network layer.
Hence, the IP of each NE on the DCN must be unique and complies with the uniform planning
of the DCN.
By default, that is, if the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address and ID of
the NE interlock each other. That is, when the NE ID is changed, the IP address is automatically
modified to 0x81000000 + ID. For example, when the NE ID is changed to 0x090001, the IP
address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.1. After the IP address is changed manually, the
interlocking relation between the ID and IP address fails.
It is recommended that the IP address of a non-gateway NE is on a different network segment
from the IP address of its gateway NE.
7.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards

The NE software considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the
physical board. The NMS also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when
managing the physical board.
Table 7-2 provides the mappings between the physical boards and logical boards.
Table 7-2 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards
Physical Board Logical Board
CSH CSH in the same slot
AUX AUX in the same slot
ISU2 ISU2 in the same slot
ISX2 ISX2 in the same slot
EM6T EM6T in the same slot
EM6F EM6F in the same slot
PIU PIU in the same slot
FAN FAN in the same slot
ODU ODU in the slot whose number is 20 plus the

slot number of the IF board that is connected
to the ODU
7.1.5 Adaptive Modulation

Adaptive modulation (AM) is a technology wherein the modulation scheme can be adjusted
automatically based on channel quality.
When the AM technology is used, in the case of the same channel spacing, the microwave service
bandwidth varies according to the modulation scheme; the higher the modulation efficiency, the
higher the bandwidth of the transmitted services. With the QoS technology, packet services are
scheduled to queues with different priorities. The services in different queues then are

transmitted to a microwave port by using the queue scheduling algorithms. Under all channel
conditions, the service capacity varies according to the modulation scheme. Figure 7-3 provides
more details about adaptive modulation.
l When the channel quality is good (such as on days when weather conditions are favorable),
the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit more user services.
This improves transmission efficiency and spectrum utilization of the system.
l When the channel quality is degraded (such as on days with adverse weather), the
equipment adopts a low-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit only higher-priority
services within the available bandwidth and to discard lower-priority services. If lower-
priority queues are congested due to insufficient capacity of the air interface, some or all
services in these queues will be discarded. This improves anti-interference capability of a
radio link and therefore ensures the link availability for higher-priority services.
Figure 7-3 Adaptive modulation
256QAM
128QAM
64QAM
32QAM
16QAM
QPSK
16QAM
Channel
capability 32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
Packet
services
256QAM
The AM technology used by the OptiX RTN 950 has the following features:
l The AM technology uses the QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and 256QAM
modulation schemes.
l The lowest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called "reference scheme" or "modulation
scheme of guaranteed capacity") and the highest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called
"nominal scheme" or "full capacity modulation") used by the AM can be configured.
l When AM modulation schemes are switched, the transmit frequency, receive frequency,
and channel spacing remain the same.
l When AM modulation schemes are switched, a step-by-step switching scheme is used.

l AM switching is hitless. When the modulation scheme is downshifted, high-priority

services will not be affected when low-priority services are discarded. The switching
succeeds even when 100 dB/s channel fast fading occurs.
7.1.6 CCDP and XPIC

The CCDP and XPIC are two technologies that are developed based on microwave polarization
characteristics. The CCDP, wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization
waves, doubles the transmission capacity; the XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference
between the two polarization waves.
Microwave transmission can be classified into single-polarized transmission and CCDP
transmission by polarization transmission mode.
l In the case of the single-polarized transmission, a signal is transmitted over the horizontally
polarized wave or the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure
7-4.
l In the case of the CCDP transmission, two signals are transmitted over the horizontally
polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure
7-5.
Therefore, the capacity in CCDP transmission mode is double the capacity in single-polarized
transmission mode.
Figure 7-4 Single-polarized transmission
Figure 7-5 CCDP transmission
The ideal situation of CCDP transmission is that no interference exists between the two
orthogonal signals that operate at the same frequency, and then the receiver can easily recover
the two signals. In actual engineering conditions, however, regardless of the orthogonality of
the two signals, certain interference between the signals exists, due to cross-polarization
discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and channel degradation. To cancel the interference, the
XPIC technology is adopted. In the XPIC technology, the signals in the horizontal and vertical
directions are received and then processed. In this manner, the original signals are recovered.

The characteristics of the XPIC function supported by the OptiX RTN 950 are as follows:
l The XPD tolerance is increased, and the notch performance is improved.

l The maximum difference between the IF cables in two polarization directions of an XPIC
workgroup cannot exceed 12 meters in length.
l The XPIC function is realized completely through hardware.
7.1.7 RF Configuration Modes

The OptiX RTN 950 supports four RF configuration modes, namely, 1+0 non-protection
configuration, N+0 non-protection configuration, 1+1 protection configuration, and cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration.
1+0 Non-Protection Configuration

The 1+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and
no protection channel.
N+0 Non-Protection Configuration

The N+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has N working channels and
no protection channel.
The OptiX RTN 950 supports N+0 protection (1 < N ≤5).
1+1 Protection Configuration

The 1+1 protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and one
protection channel.
The 1+1 protection configuration is classified into 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD.
l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration
for the IF boards and ODUs at both ends of each hop of radio link, thus realizing the
protection.
l In the 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels with a specific frequency
interval to transmit and receive the same service signal. The opposite end selects from the
two received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
The 1+1 FD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.
l In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas with a space distance to
receive the same RF signal. The equipment selects from the two received signals. With the
1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
The 1+1 SD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.
XPIC Configuration
The XPIC adopts both the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave over
one channel to transmit two channels of signals. The radio link capacity in the case of XPIC
configuration is double the radio link capacity in the case of 1+0 configuration.

7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers

On the NMS, Ethernet ports are represented by PORTs.
l For the EM6F, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4
correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
l For the EM6T, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4
correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
7.1.9 IF_ETH Port

IP radio IF boards use their IF_ETH ports to receive services from and transmit services to the
packet plane.
On the NMS, an IF_ETH port is displayed as Microwave Interface. An IF_ETH port is an
internal GE port on a generic IF board or an XPIC IF board. Ethernet packets are transmitted to
the local IF board through its IF_ETH ports, and then mapped into IP radio frames. Ethernet
packets demapped from IP radio frames are transmitted to the packet switching unit through
IF_ETH ports.
The main differences between an IF_ETH port and a GE/FE port are as follows:
l An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port. It transmits and receives MAC frames and
does not have PHY-layer functions.
l The bandwidth at an IF_ETH port is equal to the Ethernet service bandwidth that IP
radio supports. Therefore, when the AM function is enabled for IP radio, the bandwidth at
an IF_ETH port changes according to the modulation mode.
NOTE
An internal IF_ETH port corresponds to an external IF port. Therefore, an internal IF_ETH port, like an external
IF port, can be regarded as a port connected to the packet plane.
7.1.10 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported
working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information
that the opposite end may transfer.
Auto-Negotiation Function of FE Electrical Ports

In the case of FE electrical ports, there are four common working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and 100M full-duplex. If the working mode of the local FE
electrical port does not match the working mode of the opposite FE electrical port, the two ports
cannot communicate with each other. With the auto-negotiation function, however, the two ports
can communicate with each other. The auto-negotiation function uses fast link pulses and normal
link pulses to transfer the negotiation information of the working mode so that the working mode
of the local FE electrical port matches the working mode of the opposite FE electrical port.
Table 7-3 lists the FE auto-negotiation rules.

Table 7-3 Auto-negotiation rules of FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port adopts
the auto-negotiation mode)
Working Mode of the Opposite FE Auto-Negotiation Result

Electrical Port
Auto-negotiation 100M full-duplex
10M half-duplex 10M half-duplex
10M full-duplex 10M half-duplex
NOTE
As provided in Table 7-3, when the working mode of the opposite FE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or 100M
full-duplex, the auto-negotiation result cannot realize the matching between the working modes of the FE
electrical ports at both ends. As a result, certain packets are lost. Hence, when the working mode of the opposite
FE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, you need to set the working mode of the local FE
electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.
When the FE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate the flow control function through the auto-negotiation function.
Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Electrical Ports

In the case of GE electrical ports, there are five working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-
duplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 1000M full-duplex. The auto-negotiation
function of GE electrical ports is similar to the auto-negotiation function of FE electrical ports.
Table 7-4 lists the auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports.
Table 7-4 Auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port adopts
the auto-negotiation mode)
Working Mode of the Opposite GE Auto-Negotiation Result

Electrical Port
Auto-negotiation (GE electrical port) 1000M full-duplex
Auto-negotiation (FE electrical port) 100M full-duplex
1000M full-duplex 1000M full-duplex

NOTE
As provided in Table 7-4, when the working mode of the opposite GE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or
100M full-duplex, the auto-negotiation result cannot realize the matching between the working modes of the
GE electrical ports at both ends. As a result, certain packets are lost. Hence, when the working mode of the
opposite GE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, you need to set the working mode of the
local GE electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.
When the GE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate the flow control function through the auto-negotiation function.
Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Optical Ports

GE optical ports support only the 1000M full-duplex working mode. The auto-negotiation
function of GE optical ports is used only for negotiating the flow control function.
7.1.11 Flow Control Function

When the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the port due to poor data processing/
transferring capability, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of discarded packets
caused by buffer overflow, proper flow control measures must be taken.
The half-duplex Ethernet port applies the back-pressure mechanism to control the flow. The full-
duplex Ethernet port applies PAUSE frames to control the flow. Currently, the half-duplex
Ethernet function is not widely applied. Hence, the flow control function realized by Ethernet
service boards is used for the full-duplex Ethernet ports.
The flow control function realized by Ethernet service boards is classified into two types: auto-
negotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.
Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in the auto-negotiation mode, you can adopt the auto-negotiation
flow control function. The auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l Asymmetric PAUSE toward the link partner

The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Symmetric PAUSE
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
l Both asymmetric and symmetric PAUSE
The port has the following capabilities:
– Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
– Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.
– Processes the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE
On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, the
Disabled mode and the Enable Symmetric Flow Control(symmetric PAUSE) mode.

Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, you can adopt the non-auto-negotiation
flow control function. The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Receive only
The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in
the case of congestion.
l Symmetric
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE
On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 950 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, the
Disabled mode and the Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric) mode.
7.1.12 Clock Source

A clock source is a signal source that carries the timing reference information. An NE implements
clock synchronization, by using its phase locked loop (PLL) to lock the timing information of
the clock source.
The OptiX RTN 950 supports the following clock sources:
l Radio clock source

Refers to a clock source that is extracted from the received radio signal.
l Ethernet clock source
Refers to a clock source that is extracted from the FE/GE signal by using the synchronous
Ethernet function.
l Internal clock source
Refers to a clock source that is generated through the free-run oscillation of the built-in
clock of an NE. The internal clock source has the lowest priority.
7.1.13 Clock Protection Modes

The OptiX RTN 950 supports clock source protection based on priorities, synchronization status
message (SSM) protection, and extended SSM protection.
Clock Source Protection Based on Priorities

Clock source protection is provided based on the priorities specified in the clock source priority
list. When the clock source of a higher priority fails, the clock source of a lower priority is used.
As shown in Figure 7-6, the radio links between NE1 and NE2 adopt the 1+1 protection. NE2
needs to trace the clock on the radio links to keep synchronous with NE1. In this case, the clock
sources extracted by the main and standby IF boards can be configured in the clock source
priority list. The clock source extracted by the main IF board, however, has a higher priority.

Therefore, if the 1+1 IF protection switching occurs on the radio links, the clock can be switched
at the same time.
Figure 7-6 Clock source protection based on priorities
1+1 protection
configuration
FE/GE
BSC NE1 NE2

Clock
SSM Protection
SSM protection enables automatic clock source switching to prevent timing loops. The OptiX
RTN 950 supports SSM protection. After SSM protection is enabled on an NE, automatic
protection switching of clock sources conforms to the following rules:
l According to the clock source priority list, the NE selects the clock source of the best quality
as the synchronization source.
l If multiple clock sources have the best quality, the NE selects the one of the highest priority
l The NE broadcasts the quality information of the synchronization clock source to its
downstream NEs, and also notifies its upstream NE that its own clock source cannot be
used for synchronization.
Figure 7-7 is an radio ring where the SSM protection is enabled.
When the network operates normally, the NEs on the ring select the clock source as follows:
1. NE1 selects the external clock source as the synchronization source and notifies NE2 and
NE4 of the external clock quality.
2. NE2 and NE4 select the clock source from NE1 as the synchronization source and notify
NE1 that the clock sources from NE2 and NE4 are unusable.
3. NE3 detects that the clock sources from NE2 and NE4 have the same quality and selects
the clock source of a higher priority (the clock source from NE2) as the synchronization
source. In addition, NE3 transmits the information of the synchronization source quality to
NE4 and notifies NE2 that the clock source from NE3 is unusable.
4. NE4 detects that the clock sources from NE1 and NE3 have the same quality and selects
the clock source of a higher priority (the clock source from NE3) as the synchronization
source. In addition, NE4 transmits the quality information of the synchronization clock
source to NE1 and notifies NE3 that the clock source from NE4 is unusable.
5. According to the clock quality in west and east directions and the configured clock source
priorities, NE2, NE3, and NE4 determine that the synchronization source requires no
modifications. Therefore, the clock source selection is finished.
When the radio links between NE1 and NE2 become faulty, the NEs on the ring select the clock
source as follows:

1. NE2 selects the internal source as the synchronization source and transmits the information
of the synchronization source quality to NE1 and NE3.
2. NE3 selects NE2 as the clock source and informs NE4 of the clock quality.
3. After detecting that the quality of the clock from NE1 is higher than the quality of the clock
from NE3, NE4 transmits the clock quality information to NE3 and informs NE1 that the
clock from NE4 is unavailable.
4. After detecting that the quality of the clock from NE4 is higher than the quality of the clock
from NE2, NE3 selects the clock source from NE4 as the synchronization source, transmits
the information of the synchronization source quality to NE2, and notifies NE4 that the
clock source from NE3 is unusable.
5. After detecting that the quality of the clock from NE3 is higher than the quality of the
internal clock source, NE2 selects the clock source from NE3 as the synchronization source,
transmits the information of the synchronization source quality to NE1, and notifies NE3
that the clock source from NE2 is unusable.
6. According to the clock quality in west and east directions and the configured clock source
priorities, NE2, NE3, and NE4 determine that the synchronization source requires no
modifications. Therefore, the clock source selection is completed.
NOTE
The SSM protection does not provide a complete solution to the timing loop. Therefore, when you configure
clock sources, the clocks cannot form a loop as on NE1 in this example.
Figure 7-7 SSM protection

BSC NE1
FE/GE Ethernet interface/
Internal
E W
W E
West/East/
West/East/
Internal
Internal
NE2 W NE4
E
W E
Master clock West/East/

NE3 Internal
Extended SSM Protection

The extended SSM protection uses the extended SSM protocol to provide the clock protection.
The extended SSM protocol, developed by Huawei on the basis of the SSM protocol, introduces
the concept of clock ID. Through the extended SSM protocol, you can define a clock ID for any
clock source. The clock ID of the synchronization source can be transmitted together with the
SSM protocol and be used for the automatic clock switching. The extended SSM protection is
available on the radio links.
After the extended SSM protection is enabled on an NE, the automatic clock switching conforms
to the following rules:

l According to the clock source priority list, the NE selects the clock source of the best quality
l If the clock ID of a certain clock source indicates that the clock source is from the NE itself,
the clock source is not processed.
l If multiple clock sources have the best quality, the NE selects the one of the highest priority
l The NE broadcasts the quality information and the clock ID of the synchronization clock
source to its downstream NEs, and also notifies its upstream NE that its own clock source
cannot be used for synchronization.
The clock ID takes a value from 0 to 15. 0 is the default value, indicating that the clock ID is
invalid. After the extended SSM protocol is enabled on the NE, the NE does not select clock
source 0 as the current clock source.
Clock IDs are allocated as follows:
l When the extended SSM is used, the clock ID of an external clock source cannot be
automatically extracted and needs to be allocated.
l At all the nodes that access external clock sources, the internal clock sources should have
a clock ID.
l At all the intersection nodes of a ring/chain and a ring, the internal clock sources should
have a clock ID.
l At all the intersection nodes of a ring/chain and a ring, the clock sources that are accessed
into the ring should have a clock ID.
l The clock sources other than the preceding types always use their default clock ID of 0.
l Clock IDs are used for timing reference only. They do not indicate any priority difference.
Figure 7-8 is an radio ring where the extended SSM protection is enabled.
On the ring, the following clock sources require a clock ID:
l Ethernet interface 1 on NE1
l Ethernet interface 2 on NE3
l Internal clock source on NE1
l Internal clock source on NE3

Figure 7-8 Extended SSM protection

Master NE1 Ethernet interface 1 /
FE/GE West /
East / Internal
E W
W E
West / East /
West / East /
Internal
Internal
NE2 E W NE4
W E
West /
East /
FE/GE
NE3 Ethernet interface 2 /
Master clock Internal
Slave
NOTE
l The extended SSM protection provides a complete solution to the timing loop. Therefore, when you
configure clock sources, the clocks can form a loop.
l The extended SSM protection is advantageous in the complex networking of clock protection, for example,
the dual external clocks. Hence, the extended SSM protection is used in only a few cases.
7.1.14 Clock Synchronization Policy

Users should plan a proper clock synchronization policy according to the network topology.
Clock Synchronization Policy for a Chain Network

In the case of a chain network consisting of radio links, the clock synchronization policy should
be planned according to the following principles:
l The master (source) node accesses one clock source (which can be an Ethernet clock). On
this node, the accessed clock source should be configured.
l In the case of the other nodes, the clock sources for their upper level radio links should be
configured.
l If the upper level radio link is configured with 1+1 protection, a node should be configured
with two radio clock sources, and the clock source for the main radio link should have a
higher priority than the clock source for the standby radio link.
l If a node has multiple upper level radio links (for example, the upper level radio links are
configured with XPIC), each radio link should be configured with one radio clock source
on this node. In addition, these radio clock sources should be configured with different
priorities according to the actual condition.
l The SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Figure 7-9 shows the clock synchronization policy for a chain network.
l The master node (NE1) accesses one

Ethernet clock source

. In this case, the clock source priorities for NE1 in a descending order are as follows:
Ethernet clock source
> internal clock source.
l The ISU2 boards in slots 3 and 5 on NE2 form a 1+1 IF protection group, where the ISU2
board in slot 3 functions as the main board. In addition, the radio links between NE1 and
NE2 comprise the two ISU2 boards. Hence, the clock source priorities for NE2 in a
descending order are as follows: 3-ISU2-1 > 5-ISU2-1 > internal clock source.
l The radio link between NE3 and NE2 comprises the ISU2 board in slot 3 on NE3, and thus
the clock source priorities for NE3 in a descending order are as follows: 3-ISU2-1 > internal
clock source.
Figure 7-9 Clock synchronization policy for a chain network
BSC NE1 NE2 NE3
FE/GE
3-ISU2-1/
Ethernet interface/ 3-ISU2-1/
5-ISU2-1/
Internal Internal
Internal
Clock
Clock Synchronization Policy for a Tree Network

A tree network can be considered the derivation of a chain network. Hence, a tree network can
adopt the same clock synchronization policy as a chain network.
Figure 7-10 shows the clock synchronization policy for a tree network.
l In the case of the master node (NE1), the port 1 on the EM6T board in slot 2 accesses the
Ethernet link, which functions as a clock source. Hence, the clock source priorities for NE1
in a descending order are as follows: 2-EMT6-1 > internal clock source.
l The ISX2 boards in slots 3 and 5 on NE2 form an XPIC working group, where the ISX2
board in slot 3 uses the vertical polarization mode and the ISX2 board in slot 5 uses the
horizontal polarization mode. In addition, the radio links between NE1 and NE2 comprise
the two ISX2 boards. Hence, the clock source priorities for NE2 in a descending order are
as follows: 3-ISX2-1 > 5-ISX2-1 > internal clock source.
clock source.
clock source.

clock source.
Figure 7-10 Clock synchronization policy for a tree network
NE3
3-ISU2-1/
NE1 NE2 Internal
NE4 NE5
BSC
2-EM6T-1/ 3-ISX2-1/
Internal 5-ISX2-1/
Internal
Clock 3-ISU2-1/ 3-ISU2-1/
Internal Internal
Clock Synchronization Policy for a Ring Network

If a ring network comprises only radio links, plan the clock synchronization policy according to
the following principles:
Equally divide the ring into two chains, and then plan the clock synchronization policy according
to the related policy for a chain network.
Figure 7-11 shows the clock synchronization policy for a ring network.
l The ring uses the IP radio for transmission. Thus, divide the ring into the following chains
at the master node (NE1): NE1-NE2-NE3 and NE1-NE4.
l In the case of the master node (NE1), the port 1 on the EM6T board in slot 3 accesses the
Ethernet link, which functions as a clock source. Hence, the clock source priorities for NE1
in a descending order are as follows: 3-EMT6-1 > internal clock source.
l NE2 traces the clock of the master node, and thus the clock source priorities for NE2 in a
descending order are as follows: west clock source > internal clock source.
l NE3 traces the clock of NE2, and thus the clock source priorities for NE3 in a descending
order are as follows: west clock source > internal clock source.
l NE4 traces the clock of the master node (NE1), and thus the clock source priorities for NE4
in a descending order are as follows: east clock source > internal clock source.

Figure 7-11 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network
BSC NE1
3-EM6T-1/
Internal
E W
W E
West/ East/
Internal Internal
NE2 W NE4
E
W E
West/
Internal
NE3
Clock
Clock Synchronization Policy for a Port Aggregation Network

On a port aggregation network, services of several RTN NEs are aggregated to the upper level
RTN NE through the Ethernet. Plan the clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation
network according to the following principles:
l The upper level NE accesses an Ethernet clock source.
l A lower-level NE traces the Ethernet clock source of its upper-level NE.
Figure 7-12 Clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network
NE3
NE1 NE2
1-EM6T-1/
Internal
BSC 1-EM6T-1/ 3-ISU2-1/ NE4
Internal 5-ISU2-1/
Internal
1-EM6T-1/
Clock Internal
7.2 Configuration Procedure

This section describes the procedures for configuring networks, radio links, Ethernet services,
and clocks.

7.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Network)

Configuring network data involves configuring NEs, NE attributes, NE communication
parameters, DCN solution, and NE time synchronization. Service data can be configured only
after the network data is configured.
7.2.2 Configuration Procedure (Radio Link)
The configuration procedure varies according to the IP radio link configuration mode.
7.2.3 Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Services)
Configuring Ethernet services includes configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information, and verifying the service configurations.
7.2.4 Configuration Procedure (Clocks)
Configuring clocks includes configuring clock sources, clock protection, and output clocks.
7.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Network)

Configuring network data involves configuring NEs, NE attributes, NE communication
parameters, DCN solution, and NE time synchronization. Service data can be configured only
after the network data is configured.
Figure 7-13 shows the procedure for configuring network data.

Figure 7-13 Configuration flowchart (network)

Start
Create NEs.
Set NE attributes.
Set NE communication
parameters.
Use the inband DCN solution. Use the IP over DCC solution.
Configure DCC channels. Configure DCC channels.
Configure the VLAN ID and

bandwidth used by the Set the port where the
inband DCN solution. inband DCN is enabled.
Set the port where the Enable the proxy ARP.

inband DCN is enabled.
Configure access control. Set OSPF parameters.
Create static IP routes.
Configure extended ECC.
Query IP routes.
Synchronize the NE time.
Set the status for NE

performance monitoring.
Required
Optional End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.
NOTE
l Skip the operation tasks in this section if the following tasks have been performed during NE commissioning:
the NE ID and NE name have been modified and NE communication parameters, logical boards, and the
DCN solution have been configured.
l This example describes the procedure for configuring network data when the inband DCN solution or IP
over DCC solution is used for a DCN.
Table 7-5 Procedure for creating NEs

Stage Operation Description
1 Creating NEs 8.1.1.2 It is recommended that you perform

by using the Creating NEs operations in 8.1.1.2 Creating NEs by Using
NMS by Using the the Manual Method to add one or more NEs
Manual to a large network.
Method
8.1.1.1 It is recommended that you perform

Creating NEs operations in 8.1.1.1 Creating NEs by Using
by Using the the Search Method to add NEs in other
Search scenarios. Set the parameters as follows:
Method l It is recommended that you select the IP
auto discovery mode to search for NEs,
if the Web LCT server and the gateway
NE (GNE) are on the same network
segment.
l In other scenarios, it is recommended that
you select the Search NE mode to search
for NEs.
NOTE
When the IP address of the GNE is known, it
is recommended that you use the IP address of
the GNE as Domain. For initial configuration,
it is recommended that you set the
129.9.255.255 network segment as Domain.
Table 7-6 Procedures for setting NE attributes

1 5.2.3 Required.
Logging In
to an NE

2 8.1.1.5 Required. Set the parameters as follows:

Changing l Set New ID to the value specified in DCN planning
the NE ID information.
l If an extended ID is required for the NE ID specified in
DCN planning information, change New Extended ID
accordingly.
3 8.1.1.6 Optional.
Changing
the NE
Name
4 8.1.1.4 Required.
Configuring
the Logical
Board
Table 7-7 Procedure for setting NE communication parameters


Setting NE l For the GNE, set and Subnet Mask according to the
Communica external DCN planning information.
tion
Parameters l For a GNE, if the external DCN requests a default
gateway, set Gateway IP.
l For non-GNEs, it is recommended that you set IP to
0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID is 0x090001,
set IP to 129.9.0.1. Set Subnet Mask to 255.255.0.0.
NOTE
If the IP address of a non-GNE has not been changed manually, the
IP address changes according to the NE ID and is always 0x81000000
+ NE ID. In this case, the IP address of a non-GNE need not be
changed manually.
Table 7-8 Procedure for configuring the inband DCN solution

1 8.1.3.2 Optional.
Configuring Disable the DCCs over the IF ports if only the inband DCC
DCCs solution is used on the network.

2 8.1.3.7 Perform the operations in 8.1.3.7 Configuring the VLAN ID

Configuring and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN when the OptiX
the VLAN RTN NE is connected to packet switching equipment and the
ID and packet switching equipment uses the inband DCN solution
Bandwidth but does not use the default VLAN ID (4094) or bandwidth
Used by an (512 kbit/s) planned for the inband DCN.
Inband
DCN

Configuring For Ethernet ports and IF ports that an OptiX RTN NE uses
the Enable for inband DCN communication with another OptiX RTN NE
Status of the or packet switching equipment, set Enabled Status to
Inband Enabled. For other ports, set Enabled Status to Disabled.
DCN
Function on
Ports
4 8.1.3.12 Required when the GNE needs to communicate with the NMS
Configuring through an Ethernet service port. Set the parameters as
Access follows:
Control l For the Ethernet service port, set Enabled Status to
Enabled. In addition, set IP Address and Subnet Mask
to their planned values.
l Set IP Address of the Ethernet service port to be on a
different network segment from that of the local NE.
Table 7-9 Procedure for configuring the IP over DCC solution

1 8.1.3.2 Required.
Configuring For all IF ports that are being used, set Enabled/Disabled to
DCCs Enabled and set Protocol Type to TCP/IP.
2 8.1.3.8 Required.
Configuring For all IF and FE/GE ports, set Enabled Status of the inband
the Enable DCN to Disabled.
Status of the
Inband
DCN
Function on
Ports
3 8.1.3.6 Optional.
Enabling When the IP address of the GNE is on the same network
the ARP segment as that of the non-GNE, you can enable the proxy
Proxy ARP function on the GNE.

4 8.1.3.5 Optional. Set the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol
Setting parameters to their planned values.
Parameters
of the OSPF
Protocol
5 8.1.3.4 Optional. Configure the static routes of NEs according to the

Creating planning information.
Static IP
Routes
Table 7-10 Procedure for configuring extended ECC communication

1 8.1.3.3 Required when an NE uses its Ethernet network management

Configuring port or NE cascading port for connection. Set the parameters
Extended as follows:
ECC l Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.
Communica
tion l The other parameters take their default values.
NOTE
The operations in 8.1.3.3 Configuring Extended ECC
Communication are performed to disable the automatic extended
ECC function on the NE.
Table 7-11 Procedure for querying IP routes

1 8.1.3.11 Generally:
Querying IP l A GNE has correct routes to other NEs or network
Routes segments to which the other NEs belong.
l A GNE has correct routes to the NMS or the network
segment to which the NMS belongs.

Table 7-12 Procedure for synchronizing the NE time

1 Synchroni 8.1.1.7 Required.

zing the Synchron l To synchronize the NEs with the NMS server, set
NE time izing the the parameters as follows:
NE Time
– Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
– Right-click and choose the operations from
the shortcut menu for the NEs to be
immediately synchronized with the NMS
time.
– Set the automatic synchronization parameters
as required. It is recommended that the
automatic synchronization parameters take
their default values.
l To synchronize the NEs with the NTP server, set
the parameters as follows:
– Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
– Set Standard NTP Authentication
according to the requirements of the NTP
server.
– It is recommended that you set the upper-level
NTP server that the NEs trace, as follows:
– For a GNE, set the external NTP server to
the upper-level NTP server. Set Standard
NTP Server Flag to NE IP and set
Standard NTP Server to the IP address
of the external NTP server.
– For a non-GNE, set the GNE to the upper-
level NTP server. If the non-GNE needs
to communicate with the GNE through the
HWECC protocol, set Standard NTP
Server Flag to NE ID and set Standard
NTP Server to the NE ID of the GNE. If
the non-GNE needs to communicate with
the GNE through the IP protocol, set
Standard NTP Server Flag to NE IP and
set Standard NTP Server Flag to the IP
address of the GNE.
– Set Standard NTP Server Key according
to the requirements of the NTP server.
l The NTP key needs to be specified if the NE is
synchronized with the NTP server and if the NE
identification needs to be authenticated on the
NTP server.

8.1.1.8 Required if the DST scheme for the local area is

Localizin used.
g the NE Set the parameters according to the DST settings for
Time the local area.
Table 7-13 Procedure for setting the performance monitoring status

1 8.1.2 The 15-minute and 24-hour NE performance monitoring

Configuring functions are enabled by default and therefore need not be
the enabled manually.
Performanc
e
Monitoring
Status of
NEs
7.2.2 Configuration Procedure (Radio Link)

The configuration procedure varies according to the IP radio link configuration mode.
Figure 7-14 shows the procedure for configuring IP radio links.

Figure 7-14 Configuration flowchart (IP radio links)
Procedure for configuring IP radio Procedure for configuring IP radio

links (XPIC enabled) links (XPIC disabled)
Start Start
Create an XPIC Create an IF 1+1

workgroup. protection group.
Set AM attributes of an Configure the IF/ODU

XPIC workgroup. information of a radio
link.
Create an IF 1+1 Configure the ATPC

protection group. function.
Configure the IF/ODU Set power attributes of

information of a radio an ODU.
link.
End
Set AM attributes.
Set power attributes of

an ODU.
Required
End
Optional
Procedure for Configuring an IP radio Link (XPIC Enabled)
Table 7-14 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC enabled)

1 8.2.2 Required.
Creating an Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
XPIC
Workgroup

2 8.2.3 Setting Required.

the AM Set the related parameters according to the network plan. Set
Attributes the parameters to the same values in both polarization
of the XPIC directions.
Workgroup
3 8.2.1 Required if two XPIC workgroups need to form two 1+1

Creating an protection groups.
IF 1+1 Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
Protection
NOTE
Group One XPIC workgroup cannot form a 1+1 protection group. The
horizontally and vertically polarized radio links of one XPIC
workgroup, however, can form two 1+1 protection groups with the
horizontally and vertically polarized radio links of the other XPIC
workgroup.
4 8.2.4 l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the

Configuring network plan.
the IF/ODU l Set the parameters to the same values in both polarization
Information directions.
of a Radio
Link l For radio links that use 1+1 HSB/SD configuration, you
need to configure only the IF and ODU information for
the working radio link. For radio links that use 1+1 FD
configuration, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information for the working radio link and the ODU
information for the protection radio link.
NOTE
The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the AM enabled status, modulation mode, and IP bandwidth
is set inconsistently at both ends of an IP radio link.
Procedure for Configuring an IP radio Link (XPIC Disabled)
Table 7-15 Procedure for configuring an IP radio link (XPIC disabled)

1a 8.2.1 Required if a radio link is configured with 1+1 protection.

Creating an Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
IF 1+1
Protection
Group

2a 8.2.4 Required. Set the parameters as follows:

Configuring l Set Link ID according to the network plan.
the IF/ODU
Information l Set AM Status and IF Channel Bandwidth according to
of a Radio the network plan.
Link l When the AM function is enabled on the radio links, set
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity according
to the network plan.
l When the AM function is disabled on the radio links, set
Manual Modulation Mode according to the network
plan.
l During site commissioning, set AM Status to Enabled
and set Manual Modulation Mode to Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is planned.
l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX
Power(dBm) according to the network plan.
l Set TX Status to unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) according to the
network plan.
NOTE
For radio links that use 1+1 HSB/SD configuration, you need to
configure only the IF and ODU information for the working radio
link. For radio links that use 1+1 FD configuration, you need to
configure the IF and ODU information for the working radio link and
the ODU information for the protection radio link.
3a 8.3.3.2 Required if the ATPC function needs to be used.

Configuring l If the ATPC function needs to be used, set ATPC Enable
the ATPC Status to Enabled.
Attributes
l During site commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to
Disabled.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold
(dBm) to the central value plus 10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Lower Threshold
(dBm) to the central value minus 10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status to Disabled.
NOTE
l a: Generally, during site commissioning, the preceding steps have already been completed. After site
commissioning, you need to re-set AM Status and ATPC Enable Status.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the AM enabled status, modulation mode, and IP
bandwidth is set inconsistently at both ends of an IP radio link.

7.2.3 Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Services)

Configuring Ethernet services includes configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information, and verifying the service configurations.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 7-15 shows the procedure for configuring E-Line services. The operation task for
configuring QoS is optional if QoS information is not specified in the network planning
information.
Figure 7-15 Configuration flowchart
Start
Configure a LAG.
Configure E-Line services.
Configure Ethernet ports.
Configure IF_ETH ports.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet service

configurations.
Required
End
Optional

NOTE
On the NMS, an IF_ETH port is displayed as Microwave Interface. An IF_ETH port is an internal GE port on
a generic IF board or an XPIC IF board. Ethernet packets are transmitted to the local IF board through its IF_ETH
ports, and then mapped into IP radio frames. Ethernet packets demapped from IP radio frames are transmitted
to the packet switching unit through IF_ETH ports.
An internal IF_ETH port corresponds to an external IF port. Therefore, an internal IF_ETH port, like an external
IF port, can be regarded as a port connected to the packet plane.
Procedure for Configuring a LAG
Table 7-16 Procedure for configuring a LAG

Operation Description
8.4.1.1 Required if a link aggregation group (LAG) provides protection for the
Creating a FE/GE ports or if IP radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration. Set the
LAG parameters as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as that of the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if IP radio uses the N+0/
XPIC configuration.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that of the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to load non-sharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports at both ends. In this case, you can set System
Priority as required. It is recommended that this parameter take its
default value. This parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network planning information. It is recommended that you set
this parameter to the same value for the main and slave ports at both
ends.
NOTE
The members of a 1+1 XPIC workgroup cannot be used to construct a LAG.

8.4.1.2 Setting Required if Load Sharing is Sharing.

Parameters for l It is recommended that you set System Load Sharing Hash
LAGs Algorithm to Source and Destination IP (default value), if all
Ethernet service packets carried by the LAG are IP packets.
l It is recommended that you set System Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm to Source and Destination MACs, if Ethernet service
packets carried by the LAG are not IP packets and have various source
MAC addresses and sink addresses.
l Set System Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as that
of the opposite end.
Procedure for Configuring E-Line Services
Table 7-17 Procedure for configuring E-Line services

8.4.2.1 Required. Set the parameters of point-to-point transparently transmitted

Configuring E-Line services as follows:
Point-to-Point l Main interface:
Transparently
Transmitted E- – Set Direction to UNI_UNI.
Line Services – Set Source Interface and Sink Interface according to the network
planning information.
– Source VLAN ID and Sink VLAN ID remain blank.
l Port attributes:
– For Ethernet service ports that are being used, set Enable Port to
Enable.
– Set Port Mode to Layer 2.
– For point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services, set
Encapsulation Type to Null.
– For Ethernet ports that are connected to external equipment, set
Working Mode to the same value as that of the external equipment
(generally, the working mode of the external equipment is auto-
negotiation). For Ethernet ports for connection within the network,
set Working Mode to Auto-Negotiation.

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports
Table 7-18 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
8.3.1.1 Setting Required if you need to change the value of Max Frame Length(byte).
the General It is recommended that you plan Max Frame Length(byte) to 1536 so
Attributes of that Ethernet frames with more than one tag, for example QinQ frames,
Ethernet Ports can be transmitted. If jumbo frames need to be transmitted, you need to
change the value of Max Frame Length(byte) according to the size of
jumbo frames. Generally, if an OptiX RTN NE is interconnected with a
BTS, Max Frame Length(byte) can also take its default value of 1522.
8.3.1.2 Required when the flow control function is enabled on the external
Configuring equipment that is connected to the OptiX RTN NE. Set the parameters as
the Traffic follows:
Control of l Set Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable Symmetric
Ethernet Ports Flow Control, if the external equipment uses the non-auto-negotiation
flow control function.
l Set Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable Symmetric
Flow Control, if the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation flow
control function.
8.3.1.4 Setting Optional.

the Advanced
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports
Procedure for Configuring IF_ETH Ports
Table 7-19 Procedure for configuring IF_ETH ports
8.3.2.1 Setting Optional. During configuration of point-point transparently transmitted E-

the General Line services, all related parameters, except Name and MTU (byte), have
Attributes of been configured.
the IF_ETH It is recommended that you plan MTU (byte) to 1536 so that Ethernet
Port frames with more than one tag, for example QinQ frames, can be
transmitted. If jumbo frames need to be transmitted, you need to change
the value of MTU (byte) according to the size of jumbo frames. Generally,
if an OptiX RTN NE is interconnected with a BTS, MTU (byte) can also
take its default value of 1522.
8.3.2.3 Setting Required if the Speed Air Interface Transmission at L2 and Speed Air
the Advanced Interface Transmission at L3 functions of the ISU2/ISX2 need to be
Attributes of used.
the IF_ETH Set Speed Air Interface Transmission at L2 and Speed Air Interface
Port Transmission at L3 consistently at both ends of a radio link.

Procedure for Configuring QoS
Table 7-20 Procedure for configuring QoS

8.4.3.2 Required if the default mappings for DS domains is inapplicable.

Modifying the Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.
Mapping
Relationships You can learn the default mappings for DS domains by referring to 8.4.3.10
for the DS Querying the DS Domain of a Port.
Domain
8.4.3.3 Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
Changing the packet type of DS domains.
Ports Applied Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types
8.4.3.1 Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

Creating a DS Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
8.4.3.4 Required if you need to use QoS policies other than Diffserv and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.
8.4.3.6 Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR, or shaping operation
Creating the for a specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.
8.4.3.7 Setting Required if a port policy is created.

the Port That Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.
Uses the Port
Policy
8.4.3.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations
Table 7-21 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations

8.4.4.1 Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
Creating an test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level take its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two
NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by an MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MEP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.

8.4.4.4 Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
Creating operations are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
in an MA Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs to
be the remote MEPs.
Verifying Required.
Ethernet The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
services by
using the LB
function
7.2.4 Configuration Procedure (Clocks)

Configuring clocks includes configuring clock sources, clock protection, and output clocks.
Figure 7-16 shows the procedure for configuring clocks.
Figure 7-16 Configuration flowchart (clocks)

Required
Start
Optional
Configure clock sources.
Configure SSM or extended

SSM protection.
Query the clock

synchronization status.
End

Table 7-22 Procedure for configuring clocks

1 8.5.1 Configuring the Required. Set the parameters as follows:

Clock Sources Set Clock Source according to the network plan.
2 Configu 8.5.2 Required if the SSM or extended SSM protection

ring Configuring is used. Set the parameters as follows:
SSM or Clock Subnets l Set Protection Status based on the used
extende protocol type.
d SSM
protecti l If extended SSM protection is used, allocate
on Clock Source ID for the following clock
sources:
– Internal clock source of the NE that
connects two intersecting ring and chain
or connects two intersecting rings
– Line clock source that enters a ring
through its intersecting node when an
intra-ring line clock source is configured,
regardless of whether the ring intersects
with another ring or with a chain
The values of Clock Source ID for these
clock sources must be different.
8.5.4 Required if SSM or extended SSM protection is

Configuring used.
the SSM When a local line port is connected to an NE on
Output Status the same clock subnet, set Control Statusto
Enabled. In other cases, set Control Status to
Disabled.
8.5.5 Required if SSM or extended SSM protection is

Configuring used. Set the parameters as follows:
the Clock ID When a local line port is connected to an NE on
Output Status the same clock subnet, set Enabled Status to
Enabled. In other cases, set Enabled Status to
Disabled.
8.5.3 Self- Optional.

Defined Clock
Quality
3 8.5.7 Querying the Clock l When a clock subnet uses an internal clock
Synchronization Status source of an NE as its reference clock, set NE
Clock Mode to Free-Run Mode for this NE;
set NE Clock Mode to Normal Mode for the
other NEs.
l When a clock subnet uses a clock out of the
subnet as its reference clock, set NE Clock
Mode to Normal Mode for all the NEs.

7.3 Configuration Example (Ring Network Based on Point-

to-Point Transparent Transmission)
This section describes how to configure an IP radio ring network operating in point-to-point
transparent transmission mode according to the network plan.
7.3.1 Network Diagram

This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
7.3.2 Service Planning (Network)
The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.
7.3.3 Service Planning (Radio Links)
This section describes the service planning information about all the parameters required for
configuring radio links.
7.3.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)
configuring Ethernet ports.
7.3.5 Service Planning (Clocks)
configuring clocks.
7.3.6 Configuration Process (Network)
This section describes the procedures for configuring data.
7.3.7 Configuration Process (Radio Link)
This section describes how to configure radio links.
7.3.8 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services)
This section describes how to configure Ethernet services.
7.3.9 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)
This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.
7.3.10 Configuration Process (Clocks)
This section describes how to configure clocks.

Figure 7-17 shows the topology of the IP radio network that is used in this configuration
example. The IP radio ring network requests point-to-point transparent transmission between
LAN switches and has the following service requirements:
l All the radio links use 1+0 non-protection configuration.

l The AM function is enabled for each radio link.
l Ethernet services are transmitted from each BTS. The Ethernet service capacity of each
BTS is provided in Table 7-23.

Table 7-23 Ethernet service capacity of each BTS

BTS BTS1 BTS2 BTS3
Capacity of high- 30 30 30
priority Ethernet
services (Mbit/s)
Capacity of low- 100 100 100

priority Ethernet
services (Mbit/s)
NOTE
High-priority services are services that request transmission guarantees. High-priority services are not
discarded in AM shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not request transmission guarantees.
Low-priority services may be discarded in AM shifts.
l DSCP flags are used to identify the priorities of the Ethernet services from different BTSs.
To meet the preceding requirements, configure point-to-point transparently transmitted E-line
services on NE1 to NE4, and implement QoS processing for services.
Figure 7-17 Network diagram (network topology)

NMS
Convergence
network
BSC
LAN switch
GE
NE1
GE
LAN switch
GE
GE
GE
GE BTS3
BTS1 LAN switch NE2 NE4 LAN switch
GE
GE
NE3 LAN switch BTS2
Figure 7-18 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

Figure 7-18 Network diagram (board configuration)

LAN
switch
Convergence network
NE1
BSC CSH
NE6
ISU2 ISU2
EM6T
GE
NE2 NE4
CSH CSH
NE6 NE6
ISU2 ISU2 ISU2 ISU2
EM6T EM6T
GE
BTS1
LAN
switch CSH
GE
BTS3
NE6
LAN
ISU2 ISU2 switch
EM6T
NE3 GE
LAN
switch
BTS2
7.3.2 Service Planning (Network)

The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.
l The IP radio network in this example deploys the inband DCN solution. The inband DCN
information is planned as follows:
– Channels for the inband DCN
On the IP radio network, disable the DCC channels at the microwave ports used by all
NEs.
On the IP radio network, enable the inband DCN function at the microwave ports used
by all NEs and disable the inband DCN function at other ports.
– Management VLAN ID and bandwidth of inband DCN for each NE
– The default management VLAN ID is 4094 because the Ethernet services on the IP
radio network do not use VLAN ID 4094.
– The default inband DCN bandwidth is 512 kbit/s.
– Access control for the gateway NE (NE1)
In this example, do not enable the access control function for NE1 because NE1
communicates with the NMS through its Ethernet NM port. If it communicates with the
NMS through an Ethernet service port, enable the access control function.
l Figure 7-19 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Figure 7-19 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (IP radio network)
9-1
10.0.0.1 LAN switch 10.0.0.103/16
0.0.0.0
NMS
NE1
9-2 9-4
129.9.0.2 129.9.0.4
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
NE2 NE4
9-3
129.9.0.3
0.0.0.0
NE3 ExtendedID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway
NOTE
l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.

l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1 (10.0.0.1), are interlocked with the NE IDs. If the IP
address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address is automatically modified to its planned
value when the NE ID is changed.
l NE1 is the gateway NE (GNE). Therefore, the extended ECC function on NE1 needs to be
disabled.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme for
the local area is used.
7.3.3 Service Planning (Radio Links)

configuring radio links.
Basic Information About Radio Links

The basic information about the radio links is planned based on the spectrum allocation on the
radio network and the required radio transmission capacity. For details, see Table 7-24 and
Figure 7-20.
Table 7-24 Basic information about radio links
Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4
Link ID 101 102 103 104
Tx high site NE1 NE3 NE3 NE1
Tx low site NE2 NE2 NE4 NE4

Tx frequency at 19270 19370 19270 19370

the Tx high site
(MHz)
Tx frequency at 17710 17810 17710 17810

the Tx low site
(MHz)
T/R spacing 1560 1560 1560 1560

(MHz)
Channel 50 50 50 50
spacing (MHz)
RF 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+0

configuration
mode
Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal V (vertical H (horizontal

direction polarization) polarization) polarization) polarization)
Figure 7-20 Basic information about radio links

101 104
19270M 19370M
17710M 17810M
50M NE1 50M
1+0 1+0
V-polarzation H-polarization
Tx high Tx high
Tx low Tx low
BTS1 LAN Tx low Tx low BTS3

NE2 NE4 LAN
switch Tx high Tx high switch
102 103
19370M 19270M
17810M 17710M
50M 50M
1+0 1+0
H-polarization NE3 V-polarzation
LAN
switch
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq. BTS2
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization
NOTE
This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not
related to the IDU configuration.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information

Based on the capacity of Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can compute
the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 7-25.
Table 7-25 Hybrid/AM attribute information
Capacity of 90 90 90 90
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)
Capacity of low- 300 300 300 300

priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)
AM enabling Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK

mode of the
guaranteed AM
capacity
Modulation 256QAM 256QAM 256QAM 256QAM

mode of the full
AM capacity
NOTE
The IP radio capacity and the AM function require an appropriate license file.
Power and ATPC Information

By using radio network planning software such as Pathloss, you can analyze and compute various
parameters of the radio links. The power and ATPC information about the radio links is provided
in Table 7-26.
Table 7-26 Power and ATPC information
Transmit power 16.5 (NE1) 15.5 (NE3) 16 (NE3) 15 (NE1)

(dBm) 16.5 (NE2) 15.5 (NE2) 16 (NE4) 15 (NE4)
Receive power -42 (NE1) -44 (NE3) -43 (NE3) -45 (NE1)
(dBm) -42 (NE2) -44 (NE2) -43 (NE4) -45 (NE4)
ATPC enabling Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

ATPC - - - -
automatic
threshold
enabling
Upper threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)
Lower threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)
Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)
NOTE
l The transmit power is computed in modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity.

l The receive power is computed in modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.
IF Board Information
Table 7-27 provides the information about IF boards, which is obtained based on rules for
planning the radio type, slot priority, and 1+0 non-protection configuration.
Table 7-27 IF board information

Main IF board 4-ISU2 (NE1) 4-ISU2 (NE2) 4-ISU2 (NE3) 4-ISU2 (NE4)
3-ISU2 (NE2) 3-ISU2 (NE3) 3-ISU2 (NE4) 3-ISU2 (NE1)
Standby IF - - - -
board
RF 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+0

configuration
mode
Revertive mode - - - -
WTR time(s) - - - -
Reverse - - - -
switching
enabling

NOTE
In this example, the IP radio network uses 1+0 protection configuration. If 1+1 protection is required:
l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct a 1+1 HSB protection group in slot
3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main
IF board in the slot with the smaller slot numbers.
l It is recommended that you configure the two IF boards that construct a 1+1 FD/SD protection group in slot
3 and slot 5, slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2. In addition, it is recommended that you configure the main
IF board in the slot with the smaller slot numbers.
l Generally, if 1+1 HSB protection is configured, it is recommended that the reverse switching function be
disabled; if 1+1 SD protection is configured, it is recommended that the reverse switching function be
enabled.
l If there is no special requirement, it is recommended that the other parameters for configuring 1+1 HSB/
FD/SD protection take their default values.
7.3.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)

configuring Ethernet ports.
Ethernet Port Information

Table 7-28 provides the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit services.
Table 7-28 Ethernet port information (NE1 to NE4)

Parameter 1-EM6T-1
1-EM6T-2
Encapsulation type Null
Port working mode Auto-negotiation
Maximum frame length 1536
Flow control Disabled
NOTE
l In this example, the GE port on the peer LAN switch works in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the local
GE port must also work in auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another mode, the local
Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside the network are
planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
Generally, if the equipment is directly interconnected with BTSs, take the default maximum frame length
(1522 bytes).
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flow control planning on the peer
equipment.
IF_ETH Port Information

Table 7-29 provides the information about the IF_ETH ports that transmit services.

Table 7-29 IF_ETH port information (NE1 to NE4)
Parameter 3-ISU2-1 4-ISU2-1
Encapsulation type Null Null
L2 header compression Enabled Enabled
NOTE
Speed Air Interface Transmission at L2 need to be set consistently between the two ends of a radio link.
Ethernet Protection Information

In this example, LAG protection is not used.
Ethernet Service Information

Table 7-30 to Table 7-33 provide information planned for point-to-point transparently
transmitted E-Line services.
Table 7-30 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service (NE1)
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
Service name BSCtoNE2_Tline BSCtoNE4_Tline
Service direction UNI-UNI UNI-UNI
BPDU Not transparently transmitted Not transparently transmitted
Source port 1-EM6T-1 1-EM6T-2
Source VLANs Blank Blank
Sink port 4-ISU2-1 3-ISU2-1
Sink VLANs Blank Blank
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
Service name BTS1toNE3_Tline BTS1toNE1_Tline

Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
QoS (Diffserv)
Diffserv (DS) is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value
of the BTS services be allocated according to the service type. Then, the transmission network

creates the corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value.
Each Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding DSCP values according to
the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the DSCP value, as
shown in Table 7-34. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS configuration.
Table 7-34 Service type and PHB service class

PHB Service Class DSCP Corresponding Service
Type
CS7 56 –
CS6 48 –
EF 40 Real-time voice service and

signaling service (R99
conversational and R99
streaming services)
AF4 32 –
AF3 24 Real-time OM and HSDPA

services (OM streaming and
HSPA streaming services)
AF2 16 Non-real-time R99 service

(R99 interactive and R99
background services)
AF1 8 –
BE 0 HSDPA data service (HSPA

interactive and background
services)
NOTE
l During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
l Do not modify the default mapping relationships between DS domains because the default settings already
meet the network requirements.
l Change the type of trusted packets for associated Ethernet ports in the default DS domain, because the
Ethernet ports trust packets with DSCP values, instead of packets with C-VLAN priorities.
QoS (Queue Scheduling Policies)

Generally, each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same queue scheduling policy.
Table 7-35 lists the queue scheduling policy used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.

Table 7-35 Queue scheduling policies

PHB Service Class Queue Scheduling Policy
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
AF4 SP
AF3 SP
AF2 SP
AF1 SP
BE SP
QoS (CAR or Shaping for a Specified Service Flow)

Generally, microwave backhaul networks do not require CAR or shaping because BTSs and
BSCs already perform traffic control operations.
QoS (Port Shaping)

If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth of
the aggregation services, you can perform port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet
service traffic that travels to the aggregation node, preventing congestion at the aggregation
node.
In this example, you do not need to perform port shaping.
7.3.5 Service Planning (Clocks)

configuring clocks.
Clock Source Information

An IP radio network traces the clock source information from its upstream convergence network,
as shown in Figure 7-21.

Figure 7-21 Clock source information (IP radio network)
Convergence
network
NE1
LAN GE 1-EM6T-1/
switch 1-EM6T-2/
GE
Internal
SSM
NE2 NE4
3-ISU2-1/ 3-ISU2-1/
4-ISU2-1/ 4-ISU2-1/
Internal Internal
Clock NE3
3-ISU2-1/
4-ISU2-1/
Internal
Clock Protection
In this example, the standard SSM protocol is enabled for all nodes on the ring network.
Clock Synchronization Policy (NE1)

In this example, NE1 extracts the reference clock information from its convergence network
through its GE port. Therefore, the synchronous Ethernet function is enabled for NE1 to provide
clock synchronization signals for the IP radio network through its GE port.
The synchronous Ethernet function automatically becomes the default clock restoration scheme
of NE1 after its Ethernet port extracting clock source signals from received FE/GE signals (as
shown in Figure 7-21) is added to its clock source priority table.
Clock Synchronization Policy (NE2 to NE4)

In this example, NE2 to NE4 extract reference clock information from the bit streams on radio
links, as shown in Figure 7-21.
7.3.6 Configuration Process (Network)

This section describes the procedures for configuring data.

Note
l This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure data for an NE on a
network.
l Skip the operation tasks in this section if the following tasks have been performed during
NE commissioning: the NE ID and NE name have been modified and NE communication
parameters, logical boards, and the DCN solution have been configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.1.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
NOTE
l It is recommended that you select the IP auto discovery mode to search for NEs, if the Web LCT server
and the gateway NE (GNE) are on the same network segment.
l In other scenarios, it is recommended that you select the Search NE mode to search for NEs.
NOTE
When the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as
Domain. For initial configuration, it is recommended that you set the 129.9.255.255 network segment as
Domain.
Generally, NE1 to NE4 are added to the NE list.
Step 2 Follow the instructions in 5.2.3 Logging In to an NE.
The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
NOTE
The default User Name is lct. The default Password is password.
Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.1.1.5 Changing the NE ID.

Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.1.1.4 Configuring the Logical Board.

Configure the logical boards according to the mappings between the physical boards and logical
boards.
Step 5 Follow the instructions in 8.1.3.2 Configuring DCCs.
Disable the data communications channels (DCCs) over all IF ports of NE1.
Step 6 Follow the instructions in 8.1.3.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function
on Ports.
Enable the inband DCN over all the IF ports that are used on NE1. Disable the inband DCN over
all IF ports and FE/GE ports that are not used on NE1.
Step 7 8.1.3.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN
Step 8 Follow the instructions in 8.1.3.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters.


NOTE
The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1 (10.0.0.1), are interlocked with the NE IDs. If the IP address of an
NE is not changed manually, the IP address is automatically modified to its planned value when the NE ID is
changed.
Step 9 Follow the instructions in 8.1.3.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication.

NOTE
NE1 is the gateway NE (GNE). Therefore, the extended ECC function on NE1 needs to be disabled.
Step 10 Follow the instructions in 8.1.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time.

1. Ensure that Period(days) is 1.
2. Synchronize the NE time.
Step 11 Follow the instructions in 8.1.1.8 Localizing the NE Time.

In this example, daylight saving time (DST) is used.
----End
7.3.7 Configuration Process (Radio Link)

This section describes how to configure radio links.
Note
This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure radio links on NEs.

Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.2.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
l IF parameters (3-ISU2):
l IF parameters (4-ISU2):
l ODU parameters (23-ODU):

l ODU parameters (24-ODU):
Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.3.3.1 Setting IF Attributes.
For the 3-ISU2 and 4-ISU2 on NE1, set Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot to Disabled.
Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.3.3.2 Configuring the ATPC Attributes.
For the 3-ISU2 and 4-ISU2 on NE1, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.
----End
7.3.8 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services)

This section describes how to configure Ethernet services.

Note
This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services on NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.4.2.1 Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-
Line Services.
l Point-to-point transparently transmitted services between the BSC and NE2:
l Point-to-point transparently transmitted services between the BSC and NE4:
Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.3.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.

The values for the related parameters of 1-EM6T-1, and 1-EM6T-2 on NE1 are provided as
follows.
NOTE
In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet packets that carry more than one tag, such as QinQ packets, traverse
OptiX RTN NEs, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If OptiX RTN NEs need to transmit jumbo
packets with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
Normally, if an OptiX RTN NE is interconnected with a BTS, the maximum frame length can also take its default
value of 1522.
Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.3.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the IF_ETH Port.
The values for the related parameters of 3-ISU2-1 and 4-ISU2-1 on NE1 are provided as follows.
Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.4.3.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS
Domain.
NOTE
In this example, the default mappings for the DS domain are consistent with the network planning information.
Therefore, skip this step.
l Ingress Mapping Relation:

l Egress Mapping Relation:

Step 5 Follow the instructions in 8.4.3.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their
Trusted Packet Types.
NOTE
The required trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but the DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet
type needs to be modified for service-associated Ethernet ports that are applied in the default DS domain.

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 8.4.3.4 Creating a Port Policy.

----End
7.3.9 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service

Configurations)
This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.
Note
This section describes how to verify the Ethernet services on the link between NE1 and NE2.
The process for verifying Ethernet services on other links is similar.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.4.4.1 Creating an MD.
NOTE
In this example, the default maintenance domain (MD) is used. Therefore, skip this step.
Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.4.4.2 Creating an MA.


Point-to-point transparently transmitted services between the BSC and NE2:
Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.4.4.3 Creating an MEP Point.
Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.4.4.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA.
Step 5 For NE2, refer to Step 1 to Step 4 and set the Ethernet OAM parameters.
The values for the related parameters of the MD are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Maintenance Domain Name default
Maintenance Domain Level 4

The values for the related parameters of the maintenance association (MA) are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Maintenance Association Name BTS1toNE1
Relevant Service 2-BTS1toNE1_Tline
CC Test Transmit Period 1s
The values for the related parameters of maintenance points (MPs) are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Board 1-EM6T
Port 1-EM6T-2
VLAN –
MP ID 203
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
The values for the related parameters of remote MPs are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6) 101
Step 6 Perform LB tests to verify the Ethernet services between NE1 and NE2.
Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MP and the MP
whose MP ID is 203 as the sink MP.

The test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

Step 7 Perform LB tests for Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3, between NE3 and NE4, and
between NE4 and NE1, by referring to Step 5 and Step 6.
----End
7.3.10 Configuration Process (Clocks)

This section describes how to configure clocks.
Note
This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure clocks on NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.5.1 Configuring the Clock Sources.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.5.2 Configuring Clock Subnets.

In this example, the standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol is enabled for
NE1 to NE4.
Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.5.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status.
For NE1 to NE4, NE Clock Mode of all NEs should be Normal Mode.
----End
7.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links with XPIC

Enabled)
This section describes how to configure IP radio links with cross polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) enabled, according to the network plan.

7.4.2 Service Planning

configuring XPIC radio links and a LAG group.
7.4.3 Configuration Process
This section describes how to configure radio links with the XPIC function enabled.

NOTE
This example describes only how to plan and configure XPIC radio links and LAG protection. For associated
service planning and configuration methods regarding network topologies, Ethernet services, and clocks, see
7.2 Configuration Procedure and 7.3 Configuration Example (Ring Network Based on Point-to-Point
Transparent Transmission).
The network shown in Figure 7-22 requires point-to-point transparent transmission between
LAN switches over radio links operating in IP radio. Service requirements are as follows:
l According to the spectrum planning requirement, the XPIC feature needs to be enabled.
l The AM function is enabled for IP radio links.
l Ethernet services are transmitted from BTSs. The Ethernet service capacity of each NE is
provided in Table 7-36.
Table 7-36 Ethernet service capacity of each NE

Priority Capacity (Mbit/s)
High-priority Ethernet services 200
Low-priority Ethernet services 650
NOTE
High-priority services are services that request transmission guarantees. High-priority services are not
discarded in AM shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not request transmission guarantees.
Low-priority services may be discarded in AM shifts.
l IP radio links request load-sharing LAG protection to increase bandwidths for Ethernet
services.
l DSCP flags are used to identify the priorities of the Ethernet services from different BTSs.
To meet the preceding requirements, configure IP radio links with XPIC enabled between NE1
and NE2 to bear point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services, create a load-sharing
LAG group, and implement QoS processing for services.

Figure 7-22 Network diagram
H-polarization
V-polarization
XPIC 2
H-polarization
V-polarization
XPIC 1
LAG
NE1 NE2
GE
GE
BTS
LAN LAN
switch BSC
switch
In this example, NE1 and NE2 have same board configurations. For details, see Figure 7-23.

Figure 7-23 Board configurations (NE1 and NE2)
ODU ODU
V-polarization V-polarization
Dual-polarized
Dual-polarized
antenna
antenna
ODU ODU
H-polarization H-polarization
CSH Slot 7 Slot 8
ISX2 Slot 5 ISX2 Slot 6
ISX2 Slot 3 ISX2 Slot 4
EM6T Slot 1 Slot 2
GE
LAN
switch
7.4.2 Service Planning

configuring XPIC radio links and a LAG group.
Basic Information About Radio Links

The basic information about the radio links is provided in Table 7-37 according to the spectrum
allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission capacity.
Table 7-37 Basic information about radio links

Link ID 101 102 103 104
Tx high site NE1 NE1 NE1 NE1
Tx low site NE2 NE2 NE2 NE2
Tx frequency at the 19270 19270 19370 19370

Tx high site (MHz)
Tx frequency at the 17710 17710 17810 17810

Tx low site (MHz)

T/R spacing(MHz) 1560 1560 1560 1560
IF channel 50 50 50 50
bandwidth (MHz)
RF configuration 1+0 1+0 1+0 1+0

mode
Polarization V (vertical H (horizontal V (vertical H (horizontal

direction polarization) polarization) polarization) polarization)
NOTE
This example does not provide the planning information (except for the polarization direction) that is not
related to the IDU configuration.
Hybrid/AM Attribute Information

Based on the capacity of Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can compute
the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 7-38.
Table 7-38 Hybrid/AM attribute information

Parameter Link 1 Link 2
Capacity of Ethernet services (Mbit/ 850 850

s)
AM enabling Enabled Enabled
Modulation mode of the guaranteed QPSK QPSK

AM capacity
Modulation mode of the full AM 256QAM 256QAM

capacity
NOTE
l The IP radio capacity and the AM function require an appropriate license file.
l The H-polarized link and V-polarized link in an XPIC workgroup must have the AM function enabled/
disabled at the same time.
l When the H-polarized link and V-polarized link in an XPIC workgroup have the AM function enabled
at the same time, the links must have the same modulation schemes.
l When the H-polarized link and V-polarized link in an XPIC workgroup have the AM function disabled
at the same time, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the
Full AM Capacity of the links must be set to the same value.

Power and ATPC Information

By using radio network planning software such as Pathloss, you can analyze and compute various
parameters of the radio links. The power and ATPC information about the radio links is provided
in Table 7-39.
Table 7-39 Power and ATPC information
Transmit power 6.0 (NE1) 6.0 (NE1) 6.0 (NE1) 6.0 (NE1)
(dBm) 6.0 (NE2) 6.0 (NE2) 6.0 (NE2) 6.0 (NE2)
Receive power -45.0 (NE1) -45.0 (NE1) -45.0 (NE1) -45.0 (NE1)
(dBm) -45.0 (NE2) -45.0 (NE2) -45.0 (NE2) -45.0 (NE2)
ATPC enabling Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
ATPC automatic - - - -
threshold enabling
Upper threshold of - - - -
ATPC adjustment
(dBm)
Lower threshold of - - - -
ATPC adjustment
(dBm)
NOTE
l The transmit power is computed in modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity.

l The receive power is computed in modulation mode of the guaranteed AM capacity.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.
Configuration Information About XPIC Workgroups

Figure 7-23 shows the board configurations of NE1 and NE2. The configuration information
about XPIC workgroups is provided in Table 7-40, which is obtained based on the rules for
planning the slot allocation priority for IF boards.
Table 7-40 Configuration information about XPIC workgroups
Parameter NE1 NE2
XPIC workgroup 1 V (vertical polarization) 3-ISX2 3-ISX2
H (horizontal 5-ISX2 5-ISX2

polarization)
XPIC workgroup 2 V (vertical polarization) 4-ISX2 4-ISX2

Parameter NE1 NE2
H (horizontal 6-ISX2 6-ISX2

polarization)
LAG Information
To increase Ethernet service bandwidths provided by radio links operating in IP radio, add the
ports in the XPIC workgroups into a load-sharing LAG group. Plan the same values for NE1
and NE2. For details, see Table 7-41.
Table 7-41 LAG information
Parameter NE1 and NE2
LAG type Static (default value)
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Load sharing Load sharing
Load sharing hash algorithm Source and destination IP
System priority 32768 (default value)
Main port 3-ISX2-1
Slave port 4-ISX2-1

5-ISX2-1
6-ISX2-1
NOTE
In this example, a load-sharing LAG group needs to be configured because the Ethernet services to be transmitted
require a bandwidth far higher than the Ethernet bandwidth that one radio link operating in IP radio provides.
7.4.3 Configuration Process

This section describes how to configure radio links with the XPIC function enabled.
Note
This section uses NE1 as an example to describe how to configure radio links with the XPIC
function enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Follow the instructions in 8.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup.

Step 2 Follow the instructions in 8.2.3 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup.

Step 3 Follow the instructions in 8.2.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link.
For 23-ODU, 24-ODU, 25-ODU and 26-ODU on NE1, set Power to be Received(dBm) to
-45.0.
Step 4 Follow the instructions in 8.3.3.1 Setting IF Attributes.

For 3-ISX2 , 4-ISX2, 5-ISX2 and 6-ISX2 on NE1, enable the XPIC function and disable the
IEEE 1588 timeslot.
Step 5 Follow the instructions in 8.4.1.1 Creating a LAG.

Step 6 Follow the instructions in 8.4.1.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs.


----End

Commissioning and Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection
8 Task Collection
About This Chapter
This section describes various tasks involved in this document.

8.1 Network Management
Network management involves topology management, communication management, and
security management.
8.2 Managing Radio Links
Before you configure the radio link between two microwave sites, you need to configure the
corresponding information about the radio link.
8.3 Managing Ports
Correct parameter settings of ports are the basis of configuring ports that transmit services.
8.4 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane
Configurations of Ethernet services and features on the packet plane include Ethernet port
configuration, protection configuration, service configuration, protocol configuration, and OAM
configuration.
8.5 Managing the Clock
To ensure the clock synchronization between transmission nodes on a transport network, you
need to manage the NE clock.

8 Task Collection Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8.1 Network Management

Network management involves topology management, communication management, and
security management.
8.1.1 Managing NEs

Before you configure NEs, ensure that the NEs can be managed on the NMS.
8.1.2 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs
By default, the performance monitoring of NEs is enabled. You can disable or enable this
function manually and set the period of the performance monitoring of NEs manually.
8.1.3 Managing Communications
To manage the NE by the NMS, ensure that the DCN communication is normal.
8.1.4 Configuring Service Access of NEs
You can ensure the security of a network by setting service access of the NEs on the network.
8.1.5 Configuring an NE User
NE users refer to the users who log in to and operate NEs. Different types of NE users are
assigned different rights to log in and manage NEs.
8.1.1 Managing NEs

Before you configure NEs, ensure that the NEs can be managed on the NMS.
8.1.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

The Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP
address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In
addition, the Web LCT can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method
of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.
8.1.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method
You can only create NEs one by one by using the manual method. The manual method, unlike
the search method, does not allow creating NEs in batches.
8.1.1.3 Logging In to an NE
8.1.1.4 Configuring the Logical Board
If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the
logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the
slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.
8.1.1.5 Changing the NE ID
Modify the NE ID according to the engineering planning to guarantee that each NE ID is unique.
8.1.1.6 Changing the NE Name
To better identify the NE, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device
8.1.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time
By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server,
you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.

8.1.1.8 Localizing the NE Time

When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to
localize the NE time to synchronize the NE time with the local time.
8.1.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method

The Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP
address of the gateway NE, the IP address range of the gateway NE, or the NSAP addresses. In
addition, the Web LCT can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method
of manually creating NEs, this method is faster and more reliable.
Prerequisite
l The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In NE List, click NE Search.
Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select the search mode.
Step 3 Optional: If Search Mode is set to Search NE, you need to set the network segment.
1. Click Manage Domain.
The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
2. Optional: Click Add, and set Domain Type and Domain Address to add a network
segment.
3. Optional: Select an existing network segment, and click Modify to modify the network
segment.
4. Optional: Select an existing network segment, and click Delete to delete the network
segment.
NOTE
During initial configuration, Domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. After the gateway NE IP address of the
searched NE is changed, you need to change the value of Domain. The default network segment cannot
be modified and deleted.
Step 4 Click Search.

Step 5 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

Step 6 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully.
Step 7 Click OK.
A new NE is already added to the NE list.
Step 8 Click Cancel.
----End
8.1.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method

You can only create NEs one by one by using the manual method. The manual method, unlike
the search method, does not allow creating NEs in batches.
Prerequisite
l The communication between the NMS and the NE to be created must be normal.
l If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, the gateway NE to which the NE to be created
belongs must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE List, click Add NE. Then, select North America RTN.
Then, the Add NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Add NE dialog box, set the NE parameters.

NOTE
l The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

l ID indicates the basic NE ID. When there is no extended ID, the basic NE IDs must be unique on the networks
that are managed by the same NMS.
l Do not change the Extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the
basic NE ID.
l Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 3 Click OK.

A new NE is already added to the NE list.
----End
8.1.1.3 Logging In to an NE
Prerequisite
l The NE to be managed is already created in NE List.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.
TIP
You can select multiple NEs at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

NOTE
l The default User Name is lct.

l The default Password for user lct is password.
Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changed
from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.
Step 3 Click NE Explorer.

The NE Explorer is displayed.
TIP
To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.

TIP
l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout
diagram.
l Click to collapse/expand the legend.
----End
8.1.1.4 Configuring the Logical Board

If the logical board corresponding to the physical board is not added in the slot layout, add the
logical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in the
slot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.
Prerequisite
l All the boards must be installed correctly.

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Physical Boards.
Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required
but still not be configured for certain physical boards.
Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then select Add
XXX. XXX is the name of the board to be added.
Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then select Delete.
NOTE
Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the
board.
----End
8.1.1.5 Changing the NE ID

Modify the NE ID according to the engineering planning to guarantee that each NE ID is unique.
Prerequisite

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NE
Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.
The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Specify New ID and New Extended ID.
Step 4 Click OK.

A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.1.1.6 Changing the NE Name

To better identify the NE, name the NE according to the NE geographical location or the device
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NE
Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in Name.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot contain any space characters.

Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time

By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the time on the NMS or standard NTP server,
you can record the exact time when alarms and abnormal events occur.
Prerequisite
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone
and time must be set correctly on the PC or server that is installed with the NMS software.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on
the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal.

Web LCT
Procedure
Time Synchronization from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the synchronous mode.
If... Then...
You set Synchronous Mode to NULL Set the relevant parameters, and then click
Apply.
You set Synchronous Mode to NM Set the relevant parameters, and then click
Apply to perform step Step 5.
You set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP Set the related parameters, and then click
Apply to perform steps Step 3.

NOTE
If you only need to synchronize the NE time and need not change the type of synchronization or parameters,
select the synchronization option corresponding to the NE, right-click, and choose Synchronize with NM
Time.
Step 3 Configure the upper-layer standard NTP server of the NE.

1. Click the Standard NTP Server tab. In the Standard NTP Server tab page, click Add.
2. After setting the parameters of the standard NTP server, click OK.
NOTE
l If the NE is a GNE, set the external NTP server as the standard NTP server.
l If the NE is a non-GNE, set the GNE as the standard NTP server.
Step 4 Optional: Configure standard NTP keys.

1. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
2. Click Add.
The Add Key dialog box is displayed.
3. After the related parameters are configured, click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Set Start Time and click Apply.
----End
8.1.1.8 Localizing the NE Time

When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to
localize the NE time to synchronize the NE time with the local time.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Time Localization Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the correct time zone and daylight saving time of the NE depending on the location of the
NE.

Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.2 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs

By default, the performance monitoring of NEs is enabled. You can disable or enable this
function manually and set the period of the performance monitoring of NEs manually.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > NE
Performance Monitor Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the parameters of the performance monitoring of NEs.

1. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
2. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.
3. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.

NOTE
l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled.
l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled
in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enabled
and then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
4. Click Apply.
----End
8.1.3 Managing Communications

To manage the NE by the NMS, ensure that the DCN communication is normal.
8.1.3.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters

The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP
address, and the subnet mask.
8.1.3.2 Configuring DCCs
To meet the requirements for managing a complex network, you need to set the channel type,
protocol type, or enable status of the DCCs according to the network planning information.
8.1.3.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication
If there is no DCC between two or more NEs, you can connect the Ethernet NM ports or NE
cascading ports on the system control boards of the NEs to achieve extended ECC
communication.
8.1.3.4 Creating Static IP Routes
When dynamic routes fail to meet the planning requirements, you need to create the
corresponding static IP routes manually.
8.1.3.5 Setting Parameters of the OSPF Protocol
When the OptiX RTN equipment interconnects with third-party equipment, routing protocol
communication is supported after you set OSPF protocol parameters of the OptiX RTN
equipment based on related requirements of the third-party equipment.
8.1.3.6 Enabling the ARP Proxy
The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to
communicate with each other.

8.1.3.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN

The VLAN ID used by an inband DCN must be different from the VLAN ID used by services
and the bandwidth by an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network
for managing messages.
8.1.3.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports
The network management information can be transmitted over a link by the inband DCN only
when the inband DCN function is enabled on the ports at both ends of the link.
8.1.3.9 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN
The inband DCN supports two types of protocol: IP and HWECC. The IP is the default protocol
supported by the inband DCN. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
8.1.3.10 Querying ECC Routes
By querying ECC routes, you can check whether the correct HWECC solution is configured and
whether the communication between NEs is normal.
8.1.3.11 Querying IP Routes
By querying IP routes, you can check whether the IP over DCC solution and inband DCN
solution is configured correctly and whether the communication between NEs is normal.
8.1.3.12 Configuring Access Control
When the equipment is connected to the NMS through an Ethernet service port, you need to
configure access control.
8.1.3.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters

The communication parameters of an NE include the IP address of the NE, the gateway IP
address, and the subnet mask.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.
Step 3 Click Apply.
NOTE
l When you configure multiple parameters, click Apply respectively.

l For gateway NEs, Connection Mode is fixed to the default value Common + Security SSL.

----End
8.1.3.2 Configuring DCCs

To meet the requirements for managing a complex network, you need to set the channel type,
protocol type, or enable status of the DCCs according to the network planning information.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Step 3 Optional: Change the enable status of the DCC.
1. Double-click the cell in the Enabled/Disabled column to which the DCC corresponds.
Select the required state from the drop-down list.
2. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Change the protocol type of the DCC.
1. Double-click the cell in the Protocol Type column to which the DCC corresponds. Select
the required protocol type from the drop-down list.
2. Click Apply.

NOTE
l If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management
information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
The values recommended for Protocol Type are as follows:
l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l Default values are recommended in other scenarios.
Step 5 Optional: Create DCCs.

1. Click Create.
Then, the Create dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the attributes of the DCC.
NOTE
l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.

l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI.
3. Click OK.
----End
8.1.3.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication

If there is no DCC between two or more NEs, you can connect the Ethernet NM ports or NE
cascading ports on the system control boards of the NEs to achieve extended ECC
communication.
Prerequisite
Tools, Instruments and Materials

Web LCT
Context
The default extended ECC mode is Auto mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: You can disable the Auto mode function of the extended ECC.
1. Click Stop.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
2. Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set parameters for the extended ECC function in Specified mode at the server end.
1. Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode.
2. Set related parameters for the server end.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click OK.
Step 4 Set parameters for the extended ECC function in Specified mode at the client end.
2. Set related parameters for the client end.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click OK.
Step 5 Enable the automatic extended ECC function.

NOTE
Before enabling the automatic extended ECC function, you need to clear related parameters that are configured
in Specified mode for the server end and client end.
2. To clear parameters configured for the server end, click Clear Server.
3. Click OK.
4. To clear parameters configured for the client end, click Clear Client.
5. Click OK.

6. Set ECC Extended Mode to Auto mode.

7. Click Apply.
8. Click OK.
----End
8.1.3.4 Creating Static IP Routes

When dynamic routes fail to meet the planning requirements, you need to create the
corresponding static IP routes manually.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IP Route Management tab.
Step 3 Click New.
Then, the Create an IP Route dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the static IP route.
NOTE
The created static route has a lower priority than a dynamic route.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.1.3.5 Setting Parameters of the OSPF Protocol

When the OptiX RTN equipment interconnects with third-party equipment, routing protocol
communication is supported after you set OSPF protocol parameters of the OptiX RTN
equipment based on related requirements of the third-party equipment.
Prerequisite


Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the OSPF protocol.
NOTE
Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set OSPF parameters for DCC channels.

1. Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
2. Set the OSPF parameters for DCC channels.
3. Click Apply.
----End
8.1.3.6 Enabling the ARP Proxy

The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to
communicate with each other.

Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Step 3 Set the enable status of the proxy ARP.
NOTE
l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with
each other.
l To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the
route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after
sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast
packet looks for, the NE returns an ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast
packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address
of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the
NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.3.7 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN

The VLAN ID used by an inband DCN must be different from the VLAN ID used by services
and the bandwidth by an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network
for managing messages.
Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of System Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Step 2 Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Step 3 Set the VLAN ID and bandwidth used by an inband DCN.

NOTE
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the Ethernet Board
VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on
the network-wide inband DCN.
l Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet link.
l IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the radio link.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.3.8 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports
The network management information can be transmitted over a link by the inband DCN only
when the inband DCN function is enabled on the ports at both ends of the link.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Step 2 Click the Port Settings tab.
Step 3 Select FE/GE.
Step 4 Configure the enable status of the inband DCN function on ports.

NOTE
l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port.

l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is
enabled for the ports at both ends of a link.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Select IF.
Step 7 Configure the enable status of the inband DCN function on ports.
NOTE
l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port.

l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is
enabled for the ports at both ends of a link.
Step 8 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.3.9 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN

The inband DCN supports two types of protocol: IP and HWECC. The IP is the default protocol
supported by the inband DCN. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding board must be added to the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Step 3 Set the protocol type of the inband DCN.

NOTE
l If the values of Protocol Type are different from each other, the equipment at both ends cannot be
interconnected with each other. Therefore, Protocol Type must be set to the same value for the equipment
at both ends of a link.
l Set Protocol Type according to the network planning information. Generally, it is recommended that you
set this parameter to IP.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.3.10 Querying ECC Routes

By querying ECC routes, you can check whether the correct HWECC solution is configured and
whether the communication between NEs is normal.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Check whether the ECC route and related parameters are set correctly in NE ECC Link
Management List.
----End
8.1.3.11 Querying IP Routes

By querying IP routes, you can check whether the IP over DCC solution and inband DCN
solution is configured correctly and whether the communication between NEs is normal.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the IP Route Management tab.

Step 3 Click Query.

Step 4 Check whether the IP routes and related parameters in the routing table are in accordance with
the planning information.
----End
8.1.3.12 Configuring Access Control

When the equipment is connected to the NMS through an Ethernet service port, you need to
configure access control.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication >
DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Access Control tab.
Step 3 Set the parameters for configuring access control.
NOTE
l If the Enabled Status is set to Enabled, this port can be used to support access of the management
information from the NMS.
l If the Enabled Status is set to Disabled, this port cannot be used to support access of the management
information from the NMS.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.4 Configuring Service Access of NEs

You can ensure the security of a network by setting service access of the NEs on the network.
8.1.4.1 Configuring LCT Access to NEs

When an NE is managed by the NMS, LCT access to the NE can be configured if required.
8.1.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Access to NEs

By default, the NMS can access an NE by using Ethernet ports.

8.1.4.3 Configuring Serial Interface Access to NEs
By default, the NMS can access an NE through serial interfaces.
8.1.4.1 Configuring LCT Access to NEs

When an NE is managed by the NMS, LCT access to the NE can be configured if required.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Context
l If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has logged in, the NE determines
whether to permit the login of the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control
Switch.
l If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has not logged in, the NE permits
the login of the LCT regardless of the status of LCT Access Control Switch. The NMS,
however, can log in to an NE to which the LCT has logged in. That is, the login of the LCT
does not affect the login of the NMS. After the NMS user logs in to the NE successfully,
the logged LCT user is not affected. If LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable
Access, the logged LCT user is also not affected.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Access Allowed to enable the LCT access function.

NOTE
To disable the LCT access function, click Disable Access.
----End
8.1.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Access to NEs

By default, the NMS can access an NE by using Ethernet ports.
Prerequisite

Web LCT

l It is recommended that the LCT accesses an NE through Ethernet ports.
l If you need to initialize an NE or perform software loading by using the LCT, the LCT
needs to access the NE through Ethernet ports.
Procedure
Access Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the status of the network port to Enabled and enable the Ethernet access function of the NE.
NOTE
To disable the Ethernet access function of an NE, set the status of the network port to Disabled.
Step 3 Click Apply.

Then, a confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK. Then, close the operation result dialog box that is displayed.
----End
8.1.4.3 Configuring Serial Interface Access to NEs

By default, the NMS can access an NE through serial interfaces.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Context
If the LCT cannot access an NE through serial interfaces when the Enable Serial Port Access
check box is selected, the LCT access function may be disabled.
Procedure
Access Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the Enable Serial Port Access check box and select Access NM.
Step 3 Click Apply. and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
Step 4 Optional: Select the baud rate of the serial interface from the Baud Rate drop-down list. Click
Apply, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
----End

8.1.5 Configuring an NE User

NE users refer to the users who log in to and operate NEs. Different types of NE users are
assigned different rights to log in and manage NEs.
8.1.5.1 Creating an NE User

Based on the operation rights, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring
level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending
order. Different levels of NE users can be created as required.
8.1.5.2 Changing the Password of an NE User
Periodically changing the password of an NE user ensures the NE security.
8.1.5.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters
This topic describes how to enable the warning screen function. When a user logs in to an NE,
the NMS can display some information to the user. The displayed information can be self-
defined.
8.1.5.1 Creating an NE User

Based on the operation rights, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring
level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending
order. Different levels of NE users can be created as required.
Prerequisite
l The NE user must have the authority of System Level or higher.
l An online user can create a user at a lower level.

Web LCT
l The default NE user is at the monitoring level.
l For security of NE data, NE users are assigned operation rights based on their
responsibilities.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User
Step 2 Click Create.
The Add NE User dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the NE user according to the planning information.

NOTE
l A Debug Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities, and has the right to run debugging
commands.
l A System Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities.
l A Maintenance Level NE user has some security authorities, some configuration authorities, the
communication setting authority, and the log management authority.
l An Operation Level NE user has all fault performance authorities, some security authorities, and some
configuration authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE user has the right to use all query commands, to log in, to log out, and to change
its own password.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
8.1.5.2 Changing the Password of an NE User

Periodically changing the password of an NE user ensures the NE security.
Prerequisite
l The NE user is created.
l An online user can change the password of a user at a lower level.

Web LCT
NOTE
Periodically change the password of an NE user to avoid password leaks.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User
Step 2 Select the required NE user from the NE user management list, and click Set Password.
The Change Password dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Input New Password, and input it again in Confirm Password.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
8.1.5.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters

This topic describes how to enable the warning screen function. When a user logs in to an NE,
the NMS can display some information to the user. The displayed information can be self-
defined.
Prerequisite
The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree. Then, choose Security > NE
Security Parameters from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set Warning Screen Switching and Warning Screen Information according to the planning
information.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End

8.2 Managing Radio Links

Before you configure the radio link between two microwave sites, you need to configure the
corresponding information about the radio link.
ATPC attribute are ensured to be the same for the two radio links.
8.2.5 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status
You can learn about the current information of the IF 1+1 protection by querying the IF 1+1
protection status.
8.2.6 IF 1+1 Protection Switching
You can perform external switching on the IF 1+1 protection by performing IF 1+1 protection
switching.

Prerequisite
Slot Layout.
l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.

Web LCT
When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection through the configuration of the IF
1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service
exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.

Procedure
Step 3 Click New.

The Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.
NOTE
l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the
IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between
them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received
signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between
them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With
SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working
channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current
state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored
to normal.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. It is recommended that
you use the default value.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse
Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse
Switching to Enabled.
l Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

ATPC attribute are ensured to be the same for the two radio links.

Prerequisite
l The corresponding XPIC IF boards and the ODUs connected to the XPIC IF boards are
added to the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Click New.

The Create XPIC Protection Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the parameters for the XPIC workgroup group.
NOTE
l Set Link ID-V, Link ID-H, Transmit Power(dBM), Maximum Transmit Power(dBM), and
Transmit Frequency(MHz) according the network planning information. Set Link ID-V, Link ID-
H, Transmit Power(dBM), T/R Spacing(MHz), and ATPC Status consistently between the two ends
of a link.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End


Prerequisite
l The Workgroup must be created.

Web LCT
The XPIC IF boards, ISX2, support IP radio, and the AM attributes can be configured.
Procedure
Step 3 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab.
Step 4 Configure the AM attributes of the XPIC radio link.

NOTE
l When AM Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode.
l When AM Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according
to the channel conditions.
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain modulation scheme that
the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the IP radio must
ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the
AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the
IP radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End

Prerequisite
Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Precautions
l In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information
of the main radio link.
l In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the
main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.
l In the case of XPIC configuration, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the
two radio links in different polarization directions separately.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported, if the AM enabled status, modulation
mode, or IF bandwidth is set inconsistently for both ends of a IP radio link.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.

Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board or
ODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.
Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.
NOTE
l Link ID is set according to the planning information. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique
link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
case, you need to select Manual Modulation Mode.
AM Capacity.
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

NOTE
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used
in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating
function is disabled.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.
Step 7 Click Apply.
----End
8.2.5 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status

You can learn about the current information of the IF 1+1 protection by querying the IF 1+1
protection status.
Prerequisite
l The IF 1+1 protection must be configured.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Click Query. In Protection Group, check the IF 1+1 protection groups.
Step 4 Select the IF 1+1 protection group whose protection status needs to be queried.

Step 5 Select the board from Slot Mapping Relation.
Step 6 Right-click on the selected board and choose Query Switching Status from the shortcut menu
to check the protection status of the IF 1+1 protection group.
----End
8.2.6 IF 1+1 Protection Switching

You can perform external switching on the IF 1+1 protection by performing IF 1+1 protection
switching.
Prerequisite
l The IF 1+1 protection must be configured.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 In Protection Group, select the protection group for protection switching.
Step 4 In Slot Mapping Relation, select a working unit or the protection unit of the protection group,
and then right-click the selected unit.
Step 5 Choose the required switching mode from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.

The system displays the dialog box that indicates the successful operation.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Select the working unit or the protection unit, right-click Query Switching Status and check
whether the switching is successful.
----End
8.3 Managing Ports

Correct parameter settings of ports are the basis of configuring ports that transmit services.
8.3.1 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ports

The parameters of Ethernet ports include basic attributes, traffic control, Layer-2 attributes, and
advanced attributes.
8.3.2 Setting Parameters of the IF_ETH Port

This topic describes how to set the parameters of the IF_ETH port. The IF_ETH port is the
internal Ethernet port on an IF board in IP radio mode and is used to receive and transmit Native
ETH services or packet services.
8.3.3 Setting Parameters of IF Interfaces
This topic describes how to set the parameters of IF interfaces, including IF attributes, ATPC
attributes, and AM attributes.
8.3.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports
This section describes how to configure the parameters of ODU ports, including the transmit
frequency attribute, power attribute, ODU attribute, and advanced attribute.
8.3.1 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ports

The parameters of Ethernet ports include basic attributes, traffic control, Layer-2 attributes, and
advanced attributes.
8.3.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports

The general attributes of Ethernet ports define the physical-layer information, such as the
interface mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.
8.3.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports
After the traffic control is enabled, the Ethernet port sends the pause frame to notify the peer
end of stop sending Ethernet packets for a period if the link is congested, thus eliminating link
congestion.
8.3.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports
The L2 attributes of Ethernet ports define the link-layer information.
8.3.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports
This topic describes how to set the advanced attributes of Ethernet ports.
8.3.1.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports

The general attributes of Ethernet ports define the physical-layer information, such as the
interface mode, encapsulation type, and maximum frame length.
Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be added on the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the general attributes of Ethernet ports.

NOTE
l Port Mode specifies the mode of the Ethernet port.

l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry MPLS
tunnels.
l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets.
l If you set Encapsulation Type to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets.
l If you set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE
802.1q standard.
l If you set Encapsulation Type to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE
802.1ad QinQ standard.
l The Ethernet ports of different types support different Working Mode.
l When the equipment on the opposite side works in auto-negotiation mode, set the Working Mode of
the equipment on the local side to Auto-Negotiation.
l When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the
equipment on the local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex
depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
l When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the
equipment on the local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation depending
on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side.
l FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex,
1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l The value of Max Frame Length(byte) should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported.
l Auto-Negotiation Ability specifies the auto-negotiation capability of the Ethernet port.
l For GE optical ports, Auto-Negotiation Ability can be set to 1000M Full-Duplex only.
l Auto-Negotiation Ability is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.
l The SFP on the EM6F board supports the optical port and electrical port.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.1.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports

After the traffic control is enabled, the Ethernet port sends the pause frame to notify the peer
end of stop sending Ethernet packets for a period if the link is congested, thus eliminating link
congestion.
Prerequisite

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab.
Step 3 Configure the traffic control of Ethernet ports.
NOTE
l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode
and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is not set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with
the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled
mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.1.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports

The L2 attributes of Ethernet ports define the link-layer information.
Prerequisite
l Port Mode of Ethernet ports are set to Layer 2.

Web LCT
Procedure

Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the L2 attributes of Ethernet ports.
NOTE
l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ
Type Domain. The default value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot
set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/EM6F board .
l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set TAG to Access.
l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN
Priority is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use
the default value.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.1.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports

This topic describes how to set the advanced attributes of Ethernet ports.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the advanced attributes of Ethernet ports.

Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.2 Setting Parameters of the IF_ETH Port

This topic describes how to set the parameters of the IF_ETH port. The IF_ETH port is the
internal Ethernet port on an IF board in IP radio mode and is used to receive and transmit Native
ETH services or packet services.
8.3.2.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port

The general attributes of the IF_ETH port specify the basic information, including the port mode
and encapsulation mode.
8.3.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of the IF_ETH Port
The Layer 2 attributes of the IF_ETH port specify the relevant information about the link layer,
including the tag attribute and QinQ type domain.
8.3.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the IF_ETH Port
This topic describes how to set the advanced attributes of IF_ETH ports.
8.3.2.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port

The general attributes of the IF_ETH port specify the basic information, including the port mode
and encapsulation mode.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF board must be added to Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set the general attributes of the IF_ETH port.

NOTE
l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry tunnels.
l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE
802.1Q standard.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad
QinQ standard.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.2.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of the IF_ETH Port

The Layer 2 attributes of the IF_ETH port specify the relevant information about the link layer,
including the tag attribute and QinQ type domain.
Prerequisite
l The parameter Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Step 3 Setting the Layer 2 attributes of the IF_ETH port.

NOTE
l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ
Type Domain. The default value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot
set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set Tag to "Tag
Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set Tag to
"Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set Tag to "Hybrid".
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN
Priority needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended
that you use the default value.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.2.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the IF_ETH Port

This topic describes how to set the advanced attributes of IF_ETH ports.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Setting the advanced attributes of the IF_ETH port.

NOTE
l If Speed Air Interface Transmission at L2 is set to Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted
at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency.
l The settings of Speed Air Interface Transmission at L2 must be the same at both ends of a radio
link.
l If Speed Air Interface Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at microwave
ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency.
l The settings of Speed Air Interface Transmission at L3 must be the same at both ends of a radio
link.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.3 Setting Parameters of IF Interfaces

This topic describes how to set the parameters of IF interfaces, including IF attributes, ATPC
attributes, and AM attributes.
8.3.3.1 Setting IF Attributes

In the case of different IF boards, different parameters need to be set.
8.3.3.2 Configuring the ATPC Attributes
To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
8.3.3.3 Querying the AM Status
By querying the AM status, you can trace the change of the modulation mode when the AM
function is used.
8.3.3.4 Querying the ATPC Adjustment Records
By querying the ATPC adjustment records, you can be familiar with the running status of the
ATPC function.
8.3.3.1 Setting IF Attributes

In the case of different IF boards, different parameters need to be set.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Context
l The ISU2 boards are general-purpose IF boards.
l The ISX2 boards are general-purpose XPIC IF boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the parameters of general attributes.

l For the ISU2 board:
l For the ISX2 board:
NOTE
l Link ID is set according to the planning information. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique
link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.
l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback
is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
l If the XPIC IF board does not perform the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled should be set to Disabled.
In this case, the XPIC cable is required to perform self-loop for the XPIC port on the XPIC IF board.
l Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be set consistently between two ends of a radio link.
Step 4 Configure the parameters of AM attributes for different IF services.
For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards:
NOTE
case, you need to select Manual Modulation Mode.
AM Capacity.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End

8.3.3.2 Configuring the ATPC Attributes

To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the Slot Layout.
Precautions
l For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC
attributes of the main IF board.
l The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface
configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the
Create XPIC Protection Group window.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the parameters of ATPC attributes.
NOTE
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that
you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses
the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC
Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm).
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.3.3 Querying the AM Status

By querying the AM status, you can trace the change of the modulation mode when the AM
function is used.

Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF boards must be added in the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab.
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 Query the AM information in Hybrid/AM Configuration.
----End
8.3.3.4 Querying the ATPC Adjustment Records

By querying the ATPC adjustment records, you can be familiar with the running status of the
ATPC function.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF board must be added.

Web LCT
Procedure
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query the running information of the ATPC function.
----End
8.3.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports

This section describes how to configure the parameters of ODU ports, including the transmit
frequency attribute, power attribute, ODU attribute, and advanced attribute.
8.3.4.1 Setting the Transmit Frequency Attribute of the ODU

The transmit frequency attribute of the ODU is used to configure the transmit frequency of the
ODU and T/R spacing.
8.3.4.2 Querying the ODU Attribute

The ODU attribute is used to query the information about the ODU.
8.3.4.3 Setting the Power Attributes of the ODU
The power attribute of the ODU is used to configure the transmit power and receive power of
the ODU.
8.3.4.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the ODU
The advanced attributes of the ODU are used to configure the transmit status of the ODU.
8.3.4.5 Setting the State of an ODU Transmitter
The state of an ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the ODU transmitter is in the
unmute state, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals normally. When the ODU
transmitter is in the mute state, the ODU transmitter does not work, but the ODU can receive
microwave signals.
8.3.4.6 Querying the History Transmit Power and Receive Power
Querying the change trend of the history transmit power and receive power can provide reference
for radio link troubleshooting.
8.3.4.1 Setting the Transmit Frequency Attribute of the ODU

The transmit frequency attribute of the ODU is used to configure the transmit frequency of the
ODU and T/R spacing.
Prerequisite
Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure Transmit Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) of the ODU.

NOTE
l The value of Transmit Frequency(MHz) must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit
frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the
difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel
spacing.
l The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the
receive frequency.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing(MHz) should be set
according to the technical specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.4.2 Querying the ODU Attribute

The ODU attribute is used to query the information about the ODU.
Prerequisite
Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Equipment Information tab.
Step 3 Click Query to obtain the information about the ODU.
----End
8.3.4.3 Setting the Power Attributes of the ODU

The power attribute of the ODU is used to configure the transmit power and receive power of
the ODU.
Prerequisite

Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Power Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the power attribute parameters of the ODU.
NOTE
l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the planning information. This parameter
specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds
the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed Maximum
Transmit Power(dBm).
l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the planning information. This parameter specifies the
transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power
rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used
in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set according to the planning information. When this parameter takes
the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is
enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.4.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the ODU

The advanced attributes of the ODU are used to configure the transmit status of the ODU.
Prerequisite
Slot Layout.

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 3 Configure the parameters of the ODU, such as Configure Transmission Status.
NOTE
l RF Loopback function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is
used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.
l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.4.5 Setting the State of an ODU Transmitter

The state of an ODU transmitter can be mute or unmute. When the ODU transmitter is in the
unmute state, the ODU transmits and receives microwave signals normally. When the ODU
transmitter is in the mute state, the ODU transmitter does not work, but the ODU can receive
microwave signals.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to
the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Set Configure Transmission Status for the ODU.

NOTE
l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute.

l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can
normally receive microwave signals.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.3.4.6 Querying the History Transmit Power and Receive Power

Querying the change trend of the history transmit power and receive power can provide reference
for radio link troubleshooting.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to
the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Performance Graph Analyse from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Specify the start time and end time of a specific time span.
NOTE
The time span starts from the last routine maintenance time to the current time.
Step 3 Set Monitoring Period and Power.

Step 4 Click Draw. The history transmit and receive power curve of the ODU in the specified time
span is displayed.
----End
8.4 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the

Packet Plane
Configurations of Ethernet services and features on the packet plane include Ethernet port
configuration, protection configuration, service configuration, protocol configuration, and OAM
configuration.
8.4.1 Managing the LAG

Link aggregation allows one or multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be
aggregated together to form a LAG. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical

link by the MAC address. In this manner, the bandwidth is increased and the availability of the
links is improved.
8.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Services
The Ethernet service is classified into two types, namely, E-Line service and E-LAN service.
This section describes how to configure point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services.
8.4.3 Managing the QoS
By managing the QoS, you can provide the services of different levels for different service types.
8.4.4 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM
By using the 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain Ethernet services in an end-to-end manner.
8.4.5 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM
By using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM, you can maintain the point-to-point Ethernet links.
8.4.6 Using the RMON
The remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment
or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.
8.4.1 Managing the LAG

Link aggregation allows one or multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be
aggregated together to form a LAG. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical
link by the MAC address. In this manner, the bandwidth is increased and the availability of the
links is improved.
8.4.1.1 Creating a LAG

Between two NEs, if the bandwidth and availability of the Ethernet links need to be improved,
the new LAG must be created.
8.4.1.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs
The parameters for a LAG include port priorities and system priorities. In a static LAG, traffic
is always carried by a port with a higher priority.
8.4.1.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG
Through this operation, you can learn about the running information of the LACP used for the
LAG.
8.4.1.1 Creating a LAG

Between two NEs, if the bandwidth and availability of the Ethernet links need to be improved,
the new LAG must be created.
Prerequisite
l The board on which the LAG port to be created must be added to the Slot Layout.

Web LCT

Procedure
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The system displays the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the LAG in Attribute Settings.
NOTE
l When Automatically Assign is selected, LAG No. cannot be set.

l Revertive Mode can be set only when Load Sharing is set to Non-Sharing.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the services are switched back to the former working
channel after this channel is restored to normal.
l Set Load Sharing to the same value as the peer equipment. It is recommended that you set Load
Sharing to Non-Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for protection and set Load Sharing to
Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for increasing bandwidths.
l System Priority indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of System Priority, the higher the
priority.
l WTR Time(min) takes effect only when Revertive Mode is Revertive Mode.
Step 5 Set the LAG port in Port Settings.

1. Set Main Board and Main Port.
2. In Available Slave Ports, select Board of the slave port.
3. In Port, select the slave port, and then click .

TIP
Hold on the Ctrl key or the Shift key on the keyboard to select multiple ports.

4. Click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to Enabled.

NOTE
This operation is necessary during the configuration of LAG at air interfaces if signals on the radio link deteriorate
and LAG switching occurs.
----End
8.4.1.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs

The parameters for a LAG include port priorities and system priorities. In a static LAG, traffic
is always carried by a port with a higher priority.
Prerequisite
l The board on which the LAG to be created must be added to Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.
Step 3 Set the port priority.

NOTE
l System Load Sharing Hash Algorithm is valid only when Load Sharing of a LAG is set to Sharing.
l After the configuration data is deployed, System Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes effect for the entire
NE.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.1.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG

Through this operation, you can learn about the running information of the LACP used for the
LAG.
Prerequisite
l The LAG must be created.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
Step 3 Click Query
Step 4 In the Main Interface, select the LAG to be queried.
Step 5 Query port status of the main and slave ports.
NOTE
The system displays the information about the slave port in the lower part of the Main Interface.

Step 6 Right-click on the selected LAG and choose the specific information about the LAG from the
shortcut menu.
Step 7 Click Close.
Step 8 Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.
Step 9 Click Query.
Step 10 Query the port priority of the LAG.
----End
8.4.2 Configuring Ethernet Services

The Ethernet service is classified into two types, namely, E-Line service and E-LAN service.
This section describes how to configure point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services.
8.4.2.1 Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services

This topic describes how to create an E-Line service that is transparently transmitted end to end.
8.4.2.2 Deleting an E-Line Service
When an E-Line service is not used, you need to delete the E-Line service to release the
corresponding resources.
8.4.2.1 Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services

This topic describes how to create an E-Line service that is transparently transmitted end to end.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.

The Create E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set Direction to UNI_UNI.

Step 4 Configure the attributes of the E-Line service.
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services:

l If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set
this parameter to Transparent. That is, the parameter value Transparent takes effect only if Encapsulation
Type of the source and sink ports of the E-Line service are Null.
l Source VLAN ID and Sink VLAN ID remain blank.
Step 5 Click Port Attributes.
Step 6 Change the Ethernet port attributes of the source and sink ports. Click Apply Port Attributes.
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services:

Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to Null.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
8.4.2.2 Deleting an E-Line Service

When an E-Line service is not used, you need to delete the E-Line service to release the
corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
l The E-Line service must be configured and the service is not used.

Web LCT

Procedure
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query.
Step 3 Select the E-Line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.
Step 4 Click Query.

At this time, the E-Line service is already deleted.
----End
8.4.3 Managing the QoS

By managing the QoS, you can provide the services of different levels for different service types.
8.4.3.1 Creating a DS Domain

By creating a DS domain, you can create the mapping relation of a new DS domain and configure
the ports that use this mapping relationship.
8.4.3.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain
This topic describes how to modify the mapping relationships between packet priorities and
PHB service classes in the ingress or egress direction of a DS domain.
8.4.3.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types
This topic describes how to add or delete a port that uses the DS domain and set the packet type
over the port.
8.4.3.4 Creating a Port Policy
By creating a port policy, you can create a scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues.
8.4.3.5 Modifying the Port Policy
This section describes how to change the parameter values of a created port policy.
8.4.3.6 Creating the Traffic
By creating the traffic, you can configure ACL, CAR and shaping for a specified traffic stream
on a specified port.
8.4.3.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy
This section describes how to set the port that uses the port policy.
8.4.3.8 Configuring Port Shaping
This topic describes how to configure the traffic shaping for an egress port.
8.4.3.9 Querying the Port Policy
This topic describes how to query the port policy of a port.
8.4.3.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port
This topic describes how to query the mapping relation between a port and a DS domain.
8.4.3.1 Creating a DS Domain

By creating a DS domain, you can create the mapping relation of a new DS domain and configure
the ports that use this mapping relationship.

Prerequisite
l The board of the Ethernet ports must be added on Slot Layout.

Web LCT
The OptiX RTN 950 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping
Relation Name is default map.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.
The Create DS Mapping Relation dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 On the main interface, configure the attributes of the DS domain.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
Step 4 Click the Ingress Mapping Relation tab.

Step 5 Configure the mapping relations between the priorities of ingress packets and PHB service
classes.
Step 6 Click the Egress Mapping Relation tab.
Step 7 Configure the mapping relations between the priorities of egress packets and PHB service
classes.
Step 8 Select Board where the application ports exist from Application Port.
Step 9 Select a port from Available Port, and then click .

TIP
Hold on the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple ports.

NOTE
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA)
operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the
eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
Step 10 Click OK.
----End
8.4.3.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain

This topic describes how to modify the mapping relationships between packet priorities and
PHB service classes in the ingress or egress direction of a DS domain.
Prerequisite

Web LCT

Procedure
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the created DS domain and change its attributes on the main interface.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.
Step 3 Optional: Change the mapping relationship in the ingress direction.

1. Click the Ingress Mapping Relation tab.
2. Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the mapping
relationship between the packet priorities and PHB classes in the ingress direction.
NOTE
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS
domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping
relation.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Change the mapping relationship in the egress direction.

1. Click the Egress Mapping Relation tab.
2. Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the mapping
relationship between the packet priorities and PHB classes in the egress direction.
NOTE
l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements.
l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS
domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping
relation.
3. Click Apply.
----End
8.4.3.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types
This topic describes how to add or delete a port that uses the DS domain and set the packet type
over the port.
Prerequisite


Web LCT
Procedure
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the DS domain for which you need to add or delete an application port on the main
interface.
Step 3 Click the Apply Port tab.
Step 4 Click Modify.
Step 5 Add or delete a port that uses the DS domain.
Option Description
If... Then...
You need to add a port that uses the DS 1. Select the board where the application port is
domain located from the drop-down list of Board.
2. Select the port to be added from the drop-
down list of Available Port.
3. Click .
You need to delete a port that uses the DS 1. Select the board where the application port is
domain located from the drop-down list of Board.
2. Select the port to be deleted from the port list
of Selected Port.
3. Click .
You need to change the packet type Select a new packet type from the drop-down list
identified by the port of Packet Type.
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting the ports.

NOTE
l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.
l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.
l The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 950 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN, IP DSCP and MPLS packets that
contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS EXP value. By default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
8.4.3.4 Creating a Port Policy

By creating a port policy, you can create a scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues.
Prerequisite
l The board of the Ethernet ports must be added on Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Create a port policy by adding a port policy on the NMS.
1. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the ID and name of the port policy.
3. Configure the scheduling, weight, and shaping of the egress queues.

NOTE
l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important
characteristic of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay
in the case of congestion events.
l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output sub-
queues. The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue
according to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of
the SP scheduling algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming
Police After Reloading can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a
descending order (CS7-BE).
l Policy Weight(%) specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the
percentage of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue.
l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue
corresponding to a PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
4. Click OK.
Step 3 Create a port policy by duplicating an existing port policy.

1. Select a similar port policy and click Copy.
Then, the Duplicate QoS Policy dialog box is displayed.
2. Change the name of the port policy.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the duplicated port policy and change the scheduling, weight, and shaping of the
egress queues.
5. Click Apply.
----End
8.4.3.5 Modifying the Port Policy

This section describes how to change the parameter values of a created port policy.
Prerequisite
l The port policy must be created.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Select the port policy whose parameter values need to be changed.

Step 3 Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the queue scheduling,
weight, and queue shaping of the port queues.
NOTE
l The strict priority (SP) scheduling algorithm is designed for the key services. One important characteristic
of the key services is that higher priorities are required to minimize the response delay in the case of
congestion events.
l The weighted round robin (WRR) scheduling algorithm divides each port into multiple output sub-queues.
The polling scheduling is performed among the output sub-queues to ensure that each sub-queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the setting of the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm of the CoS queue according
to the requirement, and provides one or more queues that comply with the SP algorithm. Except for the
default value, however, the value of the WRR scheduling algorithm and the value of the SP scheduling
algorithm cannot be interleaved. That is, except for the default value, Grooming Police After Reloading
can be changed from SP to WRR according to the queue priorities in a descending order (CS7-BE).
l Policy Weight(%) specifies the weight of the policy in the WRR queue. The weight indicates the percentage
of the bandwidth resources obtained by the WRR queue.
l Bandwidth Limit indicates or specifies whether traffic shaping is enabled for an egress queue corresponding
to a PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR (kbit/s), CBS (byte), and PBS (byte) can be set only when Bandwidth Limit is set to
Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.3.6 Creating the Traffic

By creating the traffic, you can configure ACL, CAR and shaping for a specified traffic stream
on a specified port.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click New.

The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the attributes of a new traffic.

NOTE
Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.3.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy

This section describes how to set the port that uses the port policy.
Prerequisite
Tools, Instruments, and Materials

Web LCT
Procedure

Step 2 Click the Applied Object tab.
Step 3 Click Modify.

Then, the Configure Port dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the port that uses the port policy.

1. Select Board where the port that needs to use the port policy from Applied Port.
2. Select a port from Available Port, and then click .

TIP
3. Click OK.
Step 5 Delete the port that uses the port policy.
1. Select the port to be deleted from Selected Port and click .

TIP

2. Click OK.
----End
8.4.3.8 Configuring Port Shaping

This topic describes how to configure the traffic shaping for an egress port.
Prerequisite
l The Ethernet board must be created on the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.

The New dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters for the shaping of a port.
NOTE
Traffic shaping for an egress queue uses the single token bucket two color marker algorithm. The value of the
CIR must be equal to the value of the PIR. In actual traffic shaping processing, only the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping function is enabled, OptiX RTN 950 processes the packets in the buffer queue through the
following methods when no packets are available in the queue.
l When the buffer queue is empty, the packets are processed as follows: If the rate of a packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it is directly forwarded; if the rate of a packet is higher than the PIR, it enters the buffer
queue and then is forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.
l When the buffer queue is empty, certain burst packets can be forwarded if the rate of the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR in a certain period. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the
PBS.
l When the buffer queue is not empty, the packets whose rate passes the restriction of the PIR directly enter
the buffer queue and then are forwarded at a rate equal to the PIR.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

8.4.3.9 Querying the Port Policy

This topic describes how to query the port policy of a port.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Select the created port policy.
Step 3 Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Step 4 Click Query.
Step 5 Query the CoS configuration of the port policy.
Step 6 Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
Step 7 Click Query.
Step 8 Query the traffic classification of the port policy.
Step 9 Click the Applied Object tab.
Step 10 Click Query.
Step 11 Query the ports that use the port policy.
----End
8.4.3.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port

This topic describes how to query the mapping relation between a port and a DS domain.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Relation Name is default map. Before another DS domain is created, all the ports belong to this
default DS domain.

Procedure
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Ingress Mapping Relation tab.
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 Query the attributes of the DS domain and the mapping relation between the priority level of
the packets in the ingress direction and the PHB service class.
Step 5 Click the Egress Mapping Relation tab.
Step 6 Click Query.
Step 7 Query the attributes of the DS domain and the mapping relation between the priority level of
the packets in the egress direction and the PHB service class.
Step 8 Click the Apply Port tab.
Step 9 Click Query.
Step 10 Query the ports that use the DS domain.
----End
8.4.4 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM

By using the 802.1ag OAM, you can maintain Ethernet services in an end-to-end manner.
8.4.4.1 Creating an MD
A maintenance domain (MD) defines the range and level of the Ethernet OAM. MDs of different
ranges and levels can provide users with differentiated OAM services.
8.4.4.2 Creating an MA
An MD can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MAs). By creating
MAs, you can associate specific Ethernet services with MAs. This facilitates Ethernet OAM
operations.
8.4.4.3 Creating an MEP Point
An MEP is the starting and end positions of all the OAM packets. By creating an MEP, you can
check the Ethernet channel of the MEPs that belong to a same MA through the OAM operation.
8.4.4.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA
To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated by the other MEPs in the
same MA, you need to set the other MEPs to be the remote MEPs of this MEP.
8.4.4.5 Creating an MIP
The maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) can respond to specific OAM packets.
By creating an MIP, you can divide the Ethernet link between the MEPs in the same MA into
several segments, therefore facilitating the detection of the Ethernet link.
8.4.4.6 Performing a CC Test
After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically
and periodically. If the link is fault after the CC test is started at the source end, the sink equipment
reports the corresponding alarm.
8.4.4.7 Performing an LB Test

During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source
MEP and any MEP in the same maintenance association (MA).
8.4.4.8 Performing an LT Test
Based on the LB test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults.
That is, the faulty network segment can be located according to the MIP through only one test.
8.4.4.1 Creating an MD
A maintenance domain (MD) defines the range and level of the Ethernet OAM. MDs of different
ranges and levels can provide users with differentiated OAM services.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding board must be added on the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab.
Step 3 Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

The system displays the New Maintenance Domain dialog box.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the MD.
NOTE
l Maintenance Domain Level specifies the level of the maintenance domain.

l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level, the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level, and the values 5-7
indicate the user level.
l When the value is set to 0, the maintenance domain is at the lowest level. The values 0-7 indicate that
the level increases in a sequential order.
l The OAM packets whose level is higher than the preset value are transparently transmitted by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is lower than the preset value are directly discarded by the MEPs.
The OAM packets whose level is the same as the preset value are responded to or terminated by the
MEPs according to the message type.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

8.4.4.2 Creating an MA
An MD can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MAs). By creating
MAs, you can associate specific Ethernet services with MAs. This facilitates Ethernet OAM
operations.
Prerequisite
l The MD must be created.
l The Ethernet service must be created.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose
New > New Maintenance Association.
The system displays the New Maintenance Association dialog box.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the MA.

NOTE
Click in Relevant Service. Select the corresponding services in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.4.4.3 Creating an MEP Point

An MEP is the starting and end positions of all the OAM packets. By creating an MEP, you can
check the Ethernet channel of the MEPs that belong to a same MA through the OAM operation.
Prerequisite
l The MA must be created.


Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New
MEP Point.
The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the MEP point.
NOTE
l Each MEP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association.
The MP ID is required in the OAM operation.
l Direction specifies the direction of the MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates
the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.4.4.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA

To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated by the other MEPs in the
same MA, you need to set the other MEPs to be the remote MEPs of this MEP.
Prerequisite


Web LCT
Procedure
Step 3 Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point dialog
box is displayed.
Step 4 Click New.
Then, the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs.
NOTE
If other MEPs may initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set the other MEPs to be the
remote MEPs.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
8.4.4.5 Creating an MIP

The maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) can respond to specific OAM packets.
By creating an MIP, you can divide the Ethernet link between the MEPs in the same MA into
several segments, therefore facilitating the detection of the Ethernet link.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the MIP Point tab.
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.

Then, the New MIP Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the new MIP.
NOTE
l Each MIP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The
MP ID is required in the OAM operation.
l To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level
of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.4.4.6 Performing a CC Test

After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically
and periodically. If the link is fault after the CC test is started at the source end, the sink equipment
reports the corresponding alarm.
Prerequisite
l The MEP must be created.
l The remote MEPs must be created.

Web LCT
l Only the MEP can enable the CC test and function as the receiving and responding end in
the test.
l During the CC check, the source MEP constructs and transmits continuity check message
(CCM) packets periodically. After receiving the CCM packets from the source MEP, the
sink MEP directly enables the CC function for this source MEP. If the sink MEP fails to
receive the CCM packets from the source MEP within the check period (that is, 3.5 times
of the transmit period), it reports the alarm automatically.
l Performing a CC test does not affect the services.
Procedure

Step 3 Select the MEP where you need to perform the CC test and then choose OAM > Activate
CC.
NOTE
l Before the CC test, you can set CC Test Transmit Period according to the actual requirements.
l To disable a CC test, select the MEP where the CC test is performed and then choose OAM >
Deactivate.
----End
8.4.4.7 Performing an LB Test

During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source
MEP and any MEP in the same maintenance association (MA).
Prerequisite
l The source and sink MEPs in the same maintenance domain must be created.
l The CC function must be enabled.

Web LCT
l Only MEPs can initiate the LB test and function as the receive end in the test.
l During the LB test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LBM frames and starts
the timer. If the sink MP receives the LBM frames, it sends the LBR frames back to the
source MEP. This indicates that the loopback is successful. If the source MEP timer times
out, it indicates that the loopback fails.
l Performing an LB test does not affect the services.
Procedure
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
Step 4 Choose OAM > Start LB.

Then, the LB Test dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Select the method for identifying the destination MP and set the parameters involved in the LB
test.

NOTE
l To identify the destination MP according to the MP ID, select MP ID. Only the MEP ID can be set
to the Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l To identify the destination MP according to the MAC address, select Maintenance Point MAC
Address. Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Step 6 Click Start Test. Then, the LB test result is displayed in the Detection Result window.
----End
8.4.4.8 Performing an LT Test

Based on the LB test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults.
That is, the faulty network segment can be located according to the MIP through only one test.
Prerequisite
l The source and sink MEPs in the same MD must be created.
l The CC function must be enabled.

Web LCT
l Only MEPs can initiate the LT test and work as the termination point in the test.
l During the LT test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LTM frames and starts
the timer. All the MPs that receive the LTM frames send the LTR frame response.
According to the LTR frame response, you can verify all the MIPs that pass from the source
MEP to the sink MEP.
l Performing an LT test does not affect the services.
Procedure
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
Step 4 Choose OAM > Start LT.

Then, the LT Test dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Select the method for identifying the destination MP and set the parameters involved in the LT
test.
NOTE
l To identify the destination MP according to the MP ID, select MP ID. Only the MEP ID can be set
to the Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l To identify the destination MP according to the MAC address, select Maintenance Point MAC
Address. Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Step 6 Click Start Test. Then, the LT test result is displayed in the Detection Result window.
----End
8.4.5 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM

By using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM, you can maintain the point-to-point Ethernet links.
8.4.5.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function
The IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized based on the OAM auto-discovery. After the OAM auto-
discovery succeeds, the equipment automatically monitors the fault and performance of the link.
8.4.5.2 Enabling the Remote Alarm Support for Link Event
After the link event notification is enabled on the local equipment, if the OAM detects a link
fault and link performance event, the opposite equipment is informed.
8.4.5.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold
The threshold for the OAM error frame monitoring is a standard for the OAM to detect the link
performance. Generally, the default value is used. You can modify the value according to the
situation of the link.
8.4.5.4 Performing Remote Loopback
After the Ethernet port on the local equipment sends data to the port on the interconnected
equipment, the local end can request the opposite end to return the data.
8.4.5.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection
After enabling the self-loop detection on an Ethernet port, you can check the loopback of the
port and the loopback between the port and other Ethernet ports on the board.
8.4.5.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function

The IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized based on the OAM auto-discovery. After the OAM auto-
discovery succeeds, the equipment automatically monitors the fault and performance of the link.
Prerequisite


Web LCT
The OAM auto-discovery is realized through the auto-negotiation between the local equipment
and the opposite equipment. If the negotiation fails, the local equipment reports an alarm. After
the OAM auto-discovery succeeds, the link performance is monitored according to the error
frame threshold. You can set the error frame threshold on the NMS.
Procedure
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Step 3 Select the port, and set OAM Working Mode.
NOTE
l The OAM mode includes the active mode and the passive mode. For two interconnected systems, the
OAM mode of either or both systems must be the active mode. Otherwise, the OAM auto-discovery
fails.
l If both ends of a link are in passive OAM mode, a link fault occurs, or either end of a link does not
receive OAM protocol packets within 5 seconds, an alarm is reported, indicating that OAM auto-
discovery fails.
Step 4 Set Enable OAM Protocol to Enabled.
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Click the Remote OAM Parameter tab. Click Query to obtain the OAM capability of the
opposite end.
----End
8.4.5.2 Enabling the Remote Alarm Support for Link Event

After the link event notification is enabled on the local equipment, if the OAM detects a link
fault and link performance event, the opposite equipment is informed.
Prerequisite
l The OAM auto-discovery operation must successful on the equipment at both ends.

Web LCT

After the OAM auto-discovery operation is successful at both ends, the link fault detection and
performance detection are automatically started.
l To report the detected link fault event to the opposite equipment, you need to set Remote
Alarm Support for Link Event to Enabled for the local equipment.
l To report the detected link fault event to the opposite equipment, you need to set Remote
Alarm Support for Link Event to Enabled and set Error Frame Period Window
(ms) and Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frame) for the local equipment.
l After Remote Alarm Support for Link Event is set to Enabled at the opposite port, if
the opposite end detects link performance degradation, you can query the
ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm, which is reported on the local end, by using the NMS.
According to the alarm, you can determine the type of the link performance event.
l After Remote Alarm Support for Link Event is set to Enabled at the opposite port, if
the opposite equipment detects a link fault event, you can query the
ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm, which is reported at the local end, by using the NMS.
According to the alarm, you can determine the fault type.
Procedure
Step 3 Select the corresponding port and set Remote Alarm Support for Link Event to Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.5.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold

The threshold for the OAM error frame monitoring is a standard for the OAM to detect the link
performance. Generally, the default value is used. You can modify the value according to the
situation of the link.
Prerequisite
l The IEEE 802.3ah OAM function must be enabled on the remote equipment and the OAM
auto-discovery operation must be successful on the equipment at both ends.

Web LCT

After the OAM auto-discovery operation is successful, the remote link event notification
function is enabled and the monitoring time and errored frame threshold are set at the local end.
If the local equipment detects a link event in the receive direction, it informs the opposite
equipment of the link event. If the remote alarm for the link event is also supported at the opposite
end, the opposite equipment can also inform the local equipment of the link event that is detected
at the opposite end. Then, the corresponding alarm is reported at the local end.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Step 3 Select the port and set the parameters in the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab page.
NOTE
An alarm is reported if the number of errored frame events within Monitor Window or Period Window
exceeds the specified monitoring threshold.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.5.4 Performing Remote Loopback

After the Ethernet port on the local equipment sends data to the port on the interconnected
equipment, the local end can request the opposite end to return the data.
Prerequisite
l The OAM auto-discovery operation must be successful at both ends of the link.
l On the equipment that initiates the loopback, OAM Working Mode must be set to
Active.
l The equipment that responds to the loopback must support the remote loopback.

Web LCT
l If a port is capable of responding to loopbacks, it enters the loopback responding state and
reports the loopback responding alarm after receiving the command of enabling the remote
loopback function sent from the opposite OAM port. In this case, the equipment that

initiates the loopback enters the loopback initiating state and reports the loopback initiating
alarm.
l Generally, after the remote loopback function is enabled, service packets, except the
OAMPDU, are looped back at the remote end.
l After using the remote loopback function to complete the fault locating and the link
performance detection, you need to disable the remote loopback function at the end where
the loopback is initiated and then restore the services. At this time, the alarm is automatically
cleared.
Procedure
Step 3 Select the port and set Remote Side Loopback Response to Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Choose Enable Remote Loopback from the drop-down menu of OAM.
NOTE
To release remote loopbacks, select Disable Remote Loopback.
----End
8.4.5.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection

After enabling the self-loop detection on an Ethernet port, you can check the loopback of the
port and the loopback between the port and other Ethernet ports on the board.
Prerequisite
l The required board is already added on the Slot Layout.
l All the external physical ports on the Ethernet service processing board must be enabled.

Web LCT

l After the loopback detection is enabled at an Ethernet port, the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP
alarm is reported if a loopback occurs at the port.
Procedure
Step 3 Set Loopback Check to Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.6 Using the RMON

The remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment
or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.
8.4.6.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON statistics group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the real-
time statistical performance data of the port.
8.4.6.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON alarm group for an Ethernet port, you can monitor whether the
performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term.
8.4.6.3 Configuring a History Control Group
When configuring a history control group for an Ethernet port, you configure how the history
performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the history performance
data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. A maximum of 50 historical
performance entries can be saved.
8.4.6.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON history group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the statistical
history performance data of the port.
8.4.6.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON statistics group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the real-
time statistical performance data of the port.
Prerequisite

l The corresponding board must be added in the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab.
Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group.
1. Select the performance items for which statistics need to be collected.
2. Set Sampling Interval.
Sampling Interval represents the time unit of the performance statistics.
Step 4 Click Resetting begins.

NOTE
If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.
----End
8.4.6.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port

After you configure an RMON alarm group for an Ethernet port, you can monitor whether the
performance value of the port crosses the configured thresholds in the long term.
Prerequisite
l The corresponding boards must be added in the Slot Layout.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the RMON Setting tab.

Step 3 Select the boards that need to report RMON performance threshold-crossing alarms.
Step 4 Set the parameters in the Event tab page.
NOTE
Threshold Detect specifies the mode for report RMON alarms. If Threshold Detect is set to Not
Supported. threshold check is not supported for RMON performance events.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.6.3 Configuring a History Control Group

When configuring a history control group for an Ethernet port, you configure how the history
performance data of the port is monitored. The Ethernet board monitors the history performance
data of each port at the default sampling interval of 30 minutes. A maximum of 50 historical
performance entries can be saved.
Prerequisite

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Step 2 Set the parameters of the history control group.
NOTE
l Sampling Interval(s) represents the time span of the RMON performance item whose statistics are
collected. For Custom Period1, Sampling Interval(s) can range from 300s to 43200s. For Custom
Period2, Sampling Interval(s) can range from 300s to 86400s. The step for Sampling Interval(s) is
30s.
l Number of Items represents the number of RMON performance items whose statistics can be collected
at the same time. The maximum value for this parameter is 50.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
8.4.6.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port
After you configure an RMON history group for an Ethernet port, you can browse the statistical
history performance data of the port.
Prerequisite
l The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the History Group tab.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the history group.

1. Select the target port from Select port.
2. Click and specify the required time span.

3. Select the performance items to browse.

4. Under History Table Type, set the time span of the performance items to be browsed.
Step 4 Click Query.
----End
8.5 Managing the Clock

To ensure the clock synchronization between transmission nodes on a transport network, you
need to manage the NE clock.
8.5.1 Configuring the Clock Sources

This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock
synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.
8.5.2 Configuring Clock Subnets
For simple networks, such as chain networks, you need not configure the clock source protection
or you only need to configure the clock priority to implement the clock source protection. For
complex networks, such as ring networks or intersecting and tangent rings that are derived from
ring networks, you need to configure clock subnets and enable the standard SSM protocol or
extended SSM protocol to implement the clock source protection.
8.5.3 Self-Defined Clock Quality
By default, the NE considers the clock quality extracted from the clock source as the clock
quality. If the clock quality is zero (the synchronization quality is unknown), the clock is
considered as unavailable clock. In the case of any special requirements, the user can define the
clock quality for which the source clock quality and clock quality are zero.
8.5.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status
After the standard SSM protocol or extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is
enabled, the NE transmits the SSM to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default.
To prevent two clock subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the SSM bytes
from being transmitted on the link that is connected to other clock subnets.
8.5.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status
After the extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is enabled, the NE transmits
the clock ID to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default. To prevent two clock
subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the clock ID from being transmitted
on the link that is connected to other clock subnets.
8.5.6 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source
In the case of the special requirements, you can modify the recovery parameter of the clock
source.
8.5.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status

You can know the current clock synchronization status of an NE by querying the clock
8.5.1 Configuring the Clock Sources

This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned clock
synchronization scheme to ensure that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
Step 2 Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select the clock sources.

TIP
Hold on the Ctrl key on the keyboard to select multiple clock sources.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to add other clock sources.
Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority of this
clock source.
NOTE
The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal
clock source is always of the lowest priority.

Step 8 Click Apply.
----End
8.5.2 Configuring Clock Subnets

For simple networks, such as chain networks, you need not configure the clock source protection
or you only need to configure the clock priority to implement the clock source protection. For
complex networks, such as ring networks or intersecting and tangent rings that are derived from
ring networks, you need to configure clock subnets and enable the standard SSM protocol or
extended SSM protocol to implement the clock source protection.
Prerequisite
l The priority list of the clock source must be configured.

Web LCT
Procedure
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
Step 2 Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Step 3 Start the clock protection protocol and configure its parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.5.3 Self-Defined Clock Quality

By default, the NE considers the clock quality extracted from the clock source as the clock
quality. If the clock quality is zero (the synchronization quality is unknown), the clock is
considered as unavailable clock. In the case of any special requirements, the user can define the
clock quality for which the source clock quality and clock quality are zero.
Prerequisite
l The priority level of a clock source must be set.


Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Clock Quality tab.
Step 3 Click the Clock Source Quality tab.
Step 4 Set the self-defined clock quality.
NOTE
Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Click the Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level tab.
Step 7 Set the clock quality for which the quality level is zero.
NOTE
Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Step 8 Click Apply.
----End
8.5.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status

After the standard SSM protocol or extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is
enabled, the NE transmits the SSM to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default.
To prevent two clock subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the SSM bytes
from being transmitted on the link that is connected to other clock subnets.
Prerequisite
l The standard SSM or extended SSM protocol is enabled.

Web LCT

Procedure
Step 2 Click the SSM Output tab.
Step 3 Set the SSM control status.
NOTE
l Control Status is valid only when the SSM protocol or the extended SSM protocol is started.
l Control Status indicates whether the SSM is output at the line port.
l When the line port is connected to an NE in the same clock subnet, set Control Status to Enabled. Otherwise,
set this parameter to Disabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.5.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status

After the extended synchronization status message (SSM) protocol is enabled, the NE transmits
the clock ID to other NEs through the radio link or optical line by default. To prevent two clock
subnets from affecting each other, the NE needs to forbid the clock ID from being transmitted
on the link that is connected to other clock subnets.
Prerequisite
l The extended SSM protocol must be enabled.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Clock ID Status tab.
Step 3 Set the clock ID control status.

NOTE
l Enabled Status is valid only when the extended SSM protocol is started.
l Enabled Status indicates whether the clock source ID is output at the line port.
l If the line ports are connected to the NEs in the same clock subnet and if the extended SSM protocol is
started on the opposite NE, Enabled Status is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter is set to
Disabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.5.6 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source

In the case of the special requirements, you can modify the recovery parameter of the clock
source.
Prerequisite

Web LCT
Procedure
Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.
Step 2 Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
Step 3 Set the recovery parameter of the clock source.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
8.5.7 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status

You can know the current clock synchronization status of an NE by querying the clock
Prerequisite

Web LCT

Procedure
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Step 2 Click Query.
Step 3 Query the clock synchronization status.
----End

Commissioning and Configuration Guide A Glossary
A Glossary
A.1 0-9
A.2 A-E
A.3 F-J
A.4 K-O
A.5 P-T
A.6 U-Z
Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

A Glossary Commissioning and Configuration Guide
A.1 0-9
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
A.2 A-E
A
ABR See area border router
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
access service network The core NE of the WiMAX ASN. It is a logical entity with the functions of control
gateway plane. It connects the ASN to the CSN, and can communicate with the NEs in the ASN
(such as BS), the NEs in the CSN (such as AAA Server), or the NEs in other ASNs (such
as another ASN-GW). The ASN-GW can also be used as a router and bridge.
ACL See access control list
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC See analog to digital converter
Address Resolution Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
Protocol MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
alternate polarization polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or
conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
AIS See alarm indication signal
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS) . Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM See adaptive modulation
amplitude shift keying Modulation in which each significant condition in a modulating discretely-timed signal
is represented by a specified value of the amplitude of a carrier oscillation.
analog to digital An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
converter reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See automatic protection switching
area border router A router that can belong to more than two areas of which one area must be a backbone
area.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
AS See Autonomous System
ASBR See Autonomous System Boundary Router
ASK See amplitude shift keying
ASN-GW See access service network gateway
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU See administrative unit
automatic protection Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
switching to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control at the receiver
Autonomous System A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology
administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging
from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.

Autonomous System A router that exchanges routing information with other ASs.
Boundary Router
B
backward defect When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
indication to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
system programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit
bridge protocol data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray N/A
cable trough N/A
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization
CCM See continuity check message
CE See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer’s
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CF See compact flash

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
CIR See committed information rate
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
spanning tree continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of
Request Broker programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
Architecture programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object
comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,
object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

continuity check CCM is used to detect the link status.

message
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU See central processing unit
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cyclic redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
network Communication Function (DCF).
data communications The data channel that uses the D1–D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1–D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4–D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,
UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DE See discard eligible

differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-
hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated services A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
code point differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital distribution A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
frame transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of
network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Line See Ethernet line
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EF See expedited forwarding

electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications

compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
channel to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet ring protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
protection switching
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.

expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
A.3 F-J
F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FCC Federal Communications Commission; Federal Communications Commission (USA)
FD See frequency diversity
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
FFD fast failure detection
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward defect Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
indication LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System timing services to worldwide users.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GUI See graphical user interface
guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both
directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HSB See hot standby
HSM hitless switch mode
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol

ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
routing protocol

International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-

Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
Commission
International An international association that works to establish global standards for communications
Organization for and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
Standardization ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.
International An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications
Telecommunication technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
Union- letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
Telecommunication example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
Standardization Sector system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Task Force Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
IP See Internet Protocol
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.

A.4 K-O
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LCT local craft terminal
LDCP Low-density parity check code
line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
Control Protocol increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
link state The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the
advertisement condition of the link.

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead
indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP lower order path
LPT link-state pass through
LSA See link state advertisement
LSP See label switched path
LSR See label switching router
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
maintenance A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
association end point Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS maximum burst size
MD See maintenance domain
MDI See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
interface transmission.
MEP See maintenance association end point
MEP maintenance end point
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP See maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-
LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through
multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label N/A
switching traffic
engineering
N
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
network management The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.
ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,
accounting management, configuration management, security management and
performance management.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point access OSI network services.
network to network An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
interface
next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP normal link pulse
NM See network management
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network to network interface
node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
NodeB The NodeB is the function within the UMTS network that provides the physical radio
link between the UE (User Equipment) and the network. Along with the transmission
and reception of data across the radio interface the Node B also applies the codes that
are necessary to describe channels in a CDMA system.
non-gateway network A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
element transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See network service access point
NSF NSF
NSF not stop forwarding
NSSA Not-So-Stubby Area
O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
Interconnection different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
frame
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
A.5 P-T
P
packet switched A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
network
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See printed circuit board
PDU See protocol data unit
PDV packet delay variance
PE See provider edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of
a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
PHB See per-hop behavior
PIR See peak information rate
PLL See phase-locked loop
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ See priority queue
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.

priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority
2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return
it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look
at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
cable half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN See packet switched network
PTN packet transport network
PW See pseudo wire
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of
controller the radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI See remote defect indication
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
Strength Indicator receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI See remote error indication
remote defect A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
indication detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.

Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
Protocol used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
RoHS Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RPL ring protection link
RSL See received signal level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN radio transmission node
SD See space diversity

SEMF See synchronous equipment management function
SES See severely errored second

Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >=1 X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
pluggable
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSL Security Socket Layer
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC See static virtual circuit
switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
equipment object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
management function
T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering

Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee
the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic
in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
trTCM See two rate three color marker
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
two rate three color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.

A.6 U-Z
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
UL Underwriter Laboratories Inc
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal
for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network
Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface

variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
virtual local area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
W
wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN See wide area network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE
management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
WiMAX See Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Worldwide A wireless MAN access technology based on the IEEE802.16 standard. It uses the
Interoperability for microwave and millimetric wave bands. The coverage can reach dozens of kilometers.
Microwave Access
WRED See weighted random early detection
WRR See weighted round Robin
WTR See wait to restore
X
XPD cross-polarization discrimination
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation


RTN 950 Commissioning and Configuration Guide - (V100R003C01 - 01) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTN 950 Commissioning and Configuration Guide - (V100R003C01 - 01) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

Commissioning and Configuration

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 950 V100R003C01

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R005C00

The intended audience of this document are:

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

Provides additional information to emphasize

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C01

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

2 Notices for High-Risk Operations..........................................................................................2-1

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

7 Configuring Networkwide Service Data...............................................................................7-1

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

7.1.8 Ethernet Port Numbers.........................................................................................................................7-10

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

8.1.3.3 Configuring Extended ECC Communication....................................................................................8-15

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

8.3.4.2 Querying the ODU Attribute.............................................................................................................8-49

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

8.4.6.3 Configuring a History Control Group...............................................................................................8-86

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap...............................................................................................................1-7

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Figure 7-13 Configuration flowchart (network).................................................................................................7-22

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Table 7-24 Basic information about radio links.................................................................................................7-43

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

About This Chapter

1.1 General Safety Precautions

Issue 01 (2011-03-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

1.1 General Safety Precautions

All Safety Precautions

Local Laws and Regulations

Basic Installation Requirements

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2011-03-10)

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols

This symbol is for ESD protection.

This symbol is for the laser class.